IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 ■tt lAi |22 
 2.0 
 
 lU 
 
 140 
 
 I.I 
 
 .^ 
 
 ^>' 
 
 V 
 
 4>> -""^ 
 
 Fhotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 V 
 
 <«^ 
 
 29 Wn? MAM ITRMT 
 
 WMim.N.V. 14IM 
 (71«)I73-4»01 
 
 4^ 
 
 i\ 
 
/j 
 
 \ 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Inatituta fpr Historical IMiororaproductiont / Inatitut Canadian da microraproductiont hiatoriquaa 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes tachniquaa at bibiiographiquaa 
 
 The Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha bast 
 original copy availabia for filming. Faaturas of thia 
 copy which may ba bibliographically uniqua, 
 which may altar any of tha imagat in tha 
 raproduction, or which may significantly changa 
 tha usual mathod of filming, ara chackad balow. 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Colourad covars/ 
 Couvartura da coulaur 
 
 nn Covars damagad/ 
 
 Couvartura andommagAa 
 
 Covars rastorad and/or laminatad/ 
 Couvartura rastaurte at/ou paliicuMa 
 
 I I Covar titia missing/ 
 
 La titra da couvartura manqua 
 
 Colourad maps/ 
 
 Cartas giographiquaa an coulaur 
 
 □ Colourad ink (i.a. othar than blua or black)/ 
 Encra da coulaur (i.a. autra qua blaua ou noira) 
 
 I I Colourad plataa and/or illustrations/ 
 
 Planchas at/ou illuatrations an coulaur 
 
 Bound with othar material/ 
 Ralli avac d'autras documanta 
 
 Tight binding may causa shadowa or distortion 
 along intanor margin/ 
 
 La rm liura sarrAa paut causar da I'ombra ou da la 
 diatortion la long da la marga IntAriaura 
 
 Blank laavaa addad during restoration may 
 appeer within the text. Whenever poaaible, theee 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certalnes pagea blanches ajoutiae 
 lore d'une restauration apparaissent dans la texte, 
 mais, lorsque oela Atait possible, ces pat^ n'ont 
 pas 4t« fiimAas. 
 
 AdditionsI comments:/ 
 Commentalree supplAmenteiree: 
 
 L'Instltut a microfilm^ la meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a St6 possible de se procurer. L^s d^aiis 
 da cat exemplaire qui sent peut-Atre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la mithoda normale de f ilmage 
 sont indiqute ci-dessous. 
 
 □ Coloured pages/ 
 Pagea de couleur 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pagea endommagtes 
 
 Pagea restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pagea restaur^es et/ou pellicuMes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pagea dteolorAes, tachettea ou piquAea 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pagea ditach^wi 
 
 r^ Showthrough/ 
 
 Tranaparance 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 QualitA InAgala de I'lmpreaaion 
 
 Includes supplementary materii 
 Comprend du matirlel suppMmentaire 
 
 Only edition aveilable/ 
 Seule MMon diaponible 
 
 r~7| Quality of print variea/ 
 
 |~n Includes supplementary materiel/ 
 
 rn Only edition aveilable/ 
 
 Pagee wholly or partially obacured by errata 
 slips, tissuee, etc., have been refllmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Lee pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obacurolae par un feulHet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont *ti fllmAaa i nouveau de fa^on A 
 obtenir la meilleure image poaaible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction retio cheeked below/ 
 
 Ce document eat filmA au taux de rMuotlon indlquA ol-deeaoua. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 
 
 MX 
 
 30X 
 
 Y 
 
 12X 
 
 IfX 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 32X 
 
laira 
 I detail* 
 |UM du 
 it modifier 
 ig«r una 
 • filmaga 
 
 1/ 
 u4aa 
 
 Tha copy flimad hara haa baan raproduead thanlta 
 to tha ganaroaity of: 
 
 Seminary of QualMc 
 Librwry 
 
 Tha imagaa appaaring hara ara tha baat quaiity 
 poaaibia eonaidaring tha condition and iagibiiity 
 of tha originai copy and in icaaping with tha 
 Aiming contract apaciflcationa. 
 
 Original eopiaa in printad papar covara ara fiimad 
 beginning with tha front covar and anding on 
 tha iaat paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- 
 •ion, or tha bacic covar whan appropriate. Ali 
 othar original coplaa ara flimad beginning on tha 
 firat page with a printed or illuatratad impraa- 
 aion, and anding on the Iaat page with a printad 
 or illuatratad impraaaion. 
 
 Tha Iaat recorded frame on each microfiche 
 ahali contain the aymbol — »> (meening "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the aymbol y (meaning "END"), 
 whichever appliea. 
 
 L'axemplaira film* fut raproduit grice A la 
 ginAroaitA da: 
 
 Siminaira de Qirfboc 
 Bib(ioth«que 
 
 Lea imagpa auh/antaa ont 4tA raproduitea avac la 
 piua grand soin, eompte tenu de la condition at 
 da la nattet* de i'axamplaira film*, at an 
 conformit* avac lea conditions du contrat da 
 filmaga. 
 
 Lea axempleirea originaux dent la couvartura en 
 papier eat imprim4e sent filmta en commenpant 
 par la premier plat at an tarminant aoit par la 
 darniira pege qui compofte une empreinta 
 d'impraaaion ou d'iiiuatration, soit par la second 
 plat, aaion le caa. Tous las autras exempiairas 
 originaux sent fllmte an commenpant par la 
 pramlAra page qui comporte une empreinta 
 d'impraaaion ou d'illustration at an tarminant par 
 la damlAra pege qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un dee aymbolae suivants apparaltra sur la 
 damMra imege de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 caa: la symbole -^ signifie "A 8UIVRE", le 
 symbola y signifie "FIN". 
 
 ire 
 
 Meps. pletes. charta. etc.. may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratloa. Thoae too large to be 
 entirely included In one expoauro ara filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right end top to bottom, aa many framae aa 
 required. The following diagrama iliuatrata the 
 method: 
 
 Lea cartas, planchea. tableaux, etc.. pauvent Atra 
 fiimAa i dee taux da rMuction diffirenta. 
 Loraqua la document eat trap grand pour Atra 
 raproidult en un seul cllchA. il est fiimA A partir 
 de I'angia aupArlaur geuche, de gauche A droite, 
 et de haut en bea, an pranant la nombra 
 d'imegea nAcaesaira. Lee diegrammea suivants 
 illuatrent le mAthode. 
 
 »y erreta 
 edto 
 
 int 
 
 no peluro, 
 
 I90n A 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 a2x 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
-^ji^y AN ABRIDGMENT 
 
 OF 
 
 MimRAY'S 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 
 
 AND 
 
 EXERCISE ; 
 
 WITH QUESTIONS, ADAPTED TO THE USE OF 
 SCHOOLS AND ACi 
 
 \ytLSO 
 
 AN APPEI 
 
 CONTAINING RULES AND OftSSftlUTIONJ 
 WRITING WITH PERSPICUITY Axf" 
 
 BY M. J. KERNEY, 
 
 AUTHOR OF COMPENDIUM OF ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY. 
 
 MONTREAL: ARMOUR & RAMSAY. 
 
 KINGSTON: KAMSAYj ARMOUR AND CO. /^^ *^^^ 
 HAMILTON: RAMSAY AND M^K £ N D R m^ ^^ 
 
 11347. 
 
 •jf ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 V. 
 
 » 5," 
 
I 
 
 
 
 \ ■ ,' 1 
 V. 
 
 ■il f 
 
 !VI N T It K A L. 
 
 :?KlM'tU 13 Y AKMOUB AND HAMSAY. 
 
 S^ Ff'.mgois Xavier StieeL 
 
 mS 
 
 . ■? 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Thk long cstablisliod reputation of Murray's Eng- 
 lish Grammar rondors it uiiiiccossary at the present time 
 to add any comment on its merits. The large Gram- 
 mar, however, has been generally found too prolix to 
 render it a suitable text-book for the younger class of 
 learners ; but on the other hand the abridgments, that 
 have already ai)pearcd, are in many respects too con- 
 (?ise to meet the ends fo*' which tliev were designed. 
 The pi'incipal object, therefore, of the pres^ent abridge- 
 ment is to obviate tho objection urged against the former, 
 and to supply the deficiency of tlio latter. All experi- 
 onc<? proves that no system of teaching is so well cal- 
 cuiatod to ensure success as that which is accompani- 
 <3<1 by explicit and api)ropriate illustrations of the prin- 
 ciples inculcated. A short example often gives a clearer 
 (jonception of a pn.'cept than the most explicit words 
 i'ould convey. For this reason it has been thought 
 pro])er to condnne the Grammar and Exercise, to adapt 
 •Ml exercise to each chapter and section throughout the 
 work, so that the pupil at every stage of his progress 
 may have a practical illustration of the portion under his 
 immediate study. By this arrangement, it is believed, 
 that the present abridgment will in a great measure 
 supersede the use of the Exercise heretofore used iii 
 connection with the Grammar, as it contains the most 
 imi)ortant portions of that Exercise. Tiiose, however, 
 wiio may think proper to make use of Murray's Exercise 
 and Key, will find this abridgment to correspond in 
 general with the arrangement of these works. The 
 Questions, arranged at the bottom of each [)age, it is 
 hoped, will give a value to the work, and i)rove useful 
 both to teachers and pu})ils. Some slight deviation will 
 be found in ihe arrangement of the Rules of Syntax ; but 
 in gencriil th(^ language of the Orujitial has been carefully 
 preserved. 
 
 M. J. K. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY.— Chapter I, 5 
 
 Chapter ii Of Syllables and Words, .... 9 
 
 ETYMOLOGY.— Chapter I.— Parts of Speech, . 11 
 
 Chapter ii Of the Articles, 13 
 
 Chapter m. — Of the Noun, 14 
 
 Chapter iv. — Of Adjectives, 17 
 
 Chapter v. — Of Pronouns, 19 
 
 Chapter VI.— Of the Verb, 23 
 
 Chapter vi Of the Adverb, 46 
 
 Chapter vii. — Of Prepositions, 47 
 
 Chapter viii. — Of Conjunctions, 47 
 
 Chapter ix. — Of Interjections, 49 
 
 Parsing, 49 
 
 Directions for Parsing, .... 49 
 
 SYNTAX, 52 
 
 Rules for Syntax, 54 
 
 PROSODY.— Accent, 78 
 
 Quantity, Emphasis, 79 
 
 Pause, Tone, Versification^ ... 80 
 Punctuation, Comma, . . , . 83 
 
 Rules for the Comma, 83 
 
 Semicolon, 85 
 
 Colon, Period, 86 
 
 Exercise in Punctuation, ... 88 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises, .... 92 
 
 APPENDIX.— Perspicuity, ....... 99 
 
 Figures of Speech, 104 
 
 Logic, 107 
 
 Oratory, 109 
 
 Gender, 110 
 
 Number, Ill 
 
 . Rules for Spelling, 112 
 
 Elliptical Phrases, 115 
 
 Latin Phrases, ,.,.,.. 116- 
 
 sounJ 
 orgaij 
 2.1 
 Av(| 
 utterl 
 The 
 fV 
 syllal 
 A of 
 perftf 
 
 Mi 
 
 1. 
 Orthd 
 Whal 
 
 2. 
 
PAGE 
 . 5 
 
 • J 
 
 9 
 
 11 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 17 
 
 19 
 
 23 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 47 
 
 49 
 , 49 
 
 49 
 . 62 
 
 54 
 . 78 
 
 79 
 . 80 
 
 83 
 
 . 83 
 
 85 
 
 . 86 
 
 88 
 
 . 92 
 
 99 
 
 104 
 
 107 
 
 109 
 . 110 
 
 111 
 . 112 
 
 115 
 
 . iia 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 English Grammar is the art of speaking and writ- 
 ing the English language with propriety. 
 
 It ia divided into four parts, viz. Obthografht, 
 Ettmology, Syntax, and Prosodt. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 1. Orthography, the first part of grammar, treats of the 
 nature and powers of letters, and the proper method of 
 spelling words. A letter is the first principle, or least 
 part of a word. 
 
 The letters of the English language, called the Alpha- 
 bet, are twenty-six in number. 
 
 These letters are the representatives of certain articu- 
 late sounds, the elements of the language* An articulate 
 sound is a sound of the human voice formed by the 
 organs of speech. 
 
 2. Letters are divided into vowels and consonantt. 
 A vowel is an articulate sound, that can be perfectly 
 uttered by itself without the aid of any other sound. 
 The vowels are a, 0, t, 0, t£, and sometimes w and y. 
 fV and y are consonants when they begin a word or 
 syllable ; but in every other situation they are vowels* 
 A consonant is an articulate sound, which cannot be 
 perfectly uttered without the aid of a vowel : as, i, d, 
 ,/, /, which require vowels to express them fully. 
 
 1. What is Engliih Grammar'? How is it diridedl Of what does 
 Orthography treat 1 What ia a letter 1 What are they called T 
 What are these letters T What is an articulate sound 1 
 
 2. How are letters divided 1 What u a vowel 1 What is said ol 
 vt and y / What is a consonant ? 
 
6 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Note.— The following is a Ibt of the Roman, Italie, and OM 
 English characters, both Capital and Small. 
 
 ; 
 
 Cap. 
 
 Small. 
 
 Cap. 
 
 Small. 
 
 Cap. 
 
 Small. 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 ai. 
 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 is 
 
 h 
 
 bee. 
 
 1 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 t 
 
 see. 
 
 ' 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 dee. 
 
 i 
 
 £ 
 
 e 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 s 
 
 C 
 
 ee. 
 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 ff 
 
 t 
 
 ef. 
 
 
 G 
 
 g 
 
 G 
 
 g 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 jee. 
 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 H^ 
 
 h 
 
 ailch 
 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 • 
 
 t 
 
 K 
 
 ( 
 
 i or eye-' 
 
 '- 
 
 J 
 
 • 
 
 J 
 
 • 
 
 J 
 
 3 
 
 f 
 
 joy. 
 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 kay. 
 
 
 L 
 
 1 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
 JL 
 
 I 
 
 el. 
 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 ■jrvir 
 
 m 
 
 em. 
 
 
 N 
 
 n 
 
 K 
 
 n 
 
 N 
 
 tt 
 
 en. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 0. 
 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 W 
 
 9 
 
 pee. 
 
 
 Q 
 
 q 
 
 Q 
 
 9 
 
 a 
 
 q 
 
 cue. 
 
 
 R 
 
 r 
 
 R 
 
 r 
 
 21 
 
 r 
 
 ar. 
 
 
 S 
 
 8 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 Sb 
 
 s 
 
 ess. 
 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 IE 
 
 t 
 
 tee. 
 
 
 U 
 
 U 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 m 
 
 u 
 
 u or you 
 
 t 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 m 
 
 ti 
 
 vee. 
 
 ; 
 
 W 
 
 w 
 
 W 
 
 w 
 
 m 
 
 )D 
 
 double t/r 
 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 V 
 
 eks. 
 
 * 
 
 y 
 
 y 
 
 Y 
 
 y 
 
 Y 
 
 S 
 
 wy. 
 
 
 z 
 
 * 
 
 Z 
 
 z 
 
 z 
 
 ! 
 
 ud or zee 
 
ORTHOGRAPHT. 
 
 «IiC| and OM 
 
 at, 
 
 bee, 
 
 see. 
 
 dee. 
 
 ee, 
 
 ef. 
 
 jee. 
 
 aitch 
 
 i or eye* 
 
 kay. 
 
 el. 
 
 em. 
 
 en. 
 
 o. 
 pee. 
 
 cue. 
 
 ar, 
 
 eis. 
 
 tee. 
 
 u or you 
 
 vee, 
 
 double t/r 
 
 eks. 
 
 wy. 
 
 zed or zee. 
 
 A perfect alphabet of any language would eontain a number of 
 letters precisely equal to the number of simple articulate sounds be- 
 longing to the language, and each simple Eound would be represented 
 by its own distinct character. This, however, b far from being the 
 state of the English alphabet 9 it has more original souads than 
 <dbtinct significant letters. But to obviate the inconvenience that 
 would naturally arbe, many of these letters are made to represent 
 ■not only one, but several sounds. 
 
 The following tables represents the number of vowel sounds : 
 
 Words containing the 
 nmpletoundi. 
 
 o, as in /of e, paper, 
 a, as in /ar, father, 
 a, as in /u//, water. 
 a, as in/uf, mat, marry. 
 
 •«, as in me, here, metre, 
 c, as in met, let, get 
 
 «, as in pinty tile. 
 «, as in jptn, sin. 
 
 0, as in no, note, notice, 
 o, as in move, prove. 
 «, as in nor, for, or. 
 4, as in not, got. 
 
 tt, as in tube, curate. 
 
 u, as in tub, cub. 
 
 tt, asin/uW, pull. 
 By this) table it appears that there are in the English langui^e 
 fifteen simple vowel sounds, which are represented by only five distinct 
 •characters. The simple consonant sounds are twenty-two : as B, 
 ^beard in 6ay, tub; D, in day, sad; F, in off, for, &c. 
 
 3. Consonants are divided into mutes and semi-voweis. 
 The mutes cannot be sounded at all without the aid of a 
 vowel. They are 6, p, d, <, k, with c and g hard. The 
 «emi-vowels have an imperfect sound of themselves. 
 They are/, /, m, n, r, *, v, y, «, with c and g soft. 
 Four of the semi-vowels, namely /, m, n, r, are also 
 distinguished by the name of liquids^ from their readily 
 uniting with other consonants, and flowing, as it were, 
 into their sounds. 
 
 3. How are eonsunants divided t What is said of the mutes and 
 what are they % What have the semi-vowels, and what are they 1 
 How are four of the semi-vowels distinguished, and why t 
 
 Letters denoting the 
 simple sounds. 
 
 A has four simple sounds. 
 
 1. The long slender English 
 
 2. The long Italian 
 
 3. The broad German 
 
 4. The short sound of the Italian 
 
 £ has two sounds. 
 
 1. The long 
 f 2. The short 
 
 I, has two sounds- 
 
 1 . The long 
 
 2. The short 
 
 O has four sounds. 
 
 1 . The long open 
 
 2. The long closed 
 
 3. The long broad 
 
 4. The short broad 
 
 V has three sounds. 
 
 1 . The long diphthongal 
 
 2. The short 
 
 3. The middle 
 
8 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 4. A diphthong is the union of two vowels, pronounced 
 by a single impulse of the voice : as, ea in beat, ou in 
 sound. A triphthong is the union of three vowels, pro- 
 nounced in like manner: as, eau in beauty, tew in view. 
 A proper diphthong is that in which both the vowels are 
 sounded: as, oi in voice, ou in ounce. An improper 
 diphthong has but one of the vowels sounded : as, the e of 
 ea in eagle, the o of oa in boat. 
 
 Note. — A more exact definition of a vowel and consonant may be 
 given in the following words. A rowel is a simple articulate sound, 
 perfect in itself, and formed by a continual effusion of the breath 
 without any alteration in the position of the mouth or any motion 
 of the organs of speech from the moment the vocal sound begins 
 until it ends. 
 
 A consonant is a simple articulate sound, imperfect in itself, but 
 which, joined to a vowel, forms a complete sound by a particular 
 motion of the organs of speech. That to and y are consonants, when 
 used as initials, appears evident from their not admitting the in- 
 definite article an before them; as it would be improper to say, 
 an walnut, an yard; and from their following a vowel without 
 any difficulty of utterance ; as, frosty winter, rosy youth. That they 
 are vowels in other situations is evident from their regularly taking 
 the sound of other vowels ; as w has the exact sound of u in saw, few, 
 new, &c., and y that of i in hymn, fly, &c. Consonants are. distin- 
 gubhcd by the organs of speech employed in pronouncing them 
 into labial, dental, guttural, and nasal. The labials are those formed 
 by the lips ; as, b, p,f, v. The dentals are formed by the teeth; as, 
 /, d, s, X and g soft. The gutturals are formed from the throat; as, 
 k, q, c. The nasals are pronounced through tiie nose ; as, m, «. The 
 mutes are divided into fure and impure. The pure are those whose 
 sounds cannot be at all prolonged ; as, k, p, t. The impure are those 
 whose sounds may be continued, though for a very short space ; as, b, 
 d, g. The semi-vowels may be subdivided into vocal and atpiraied. 
 The vocal are those formed by the voice, and are /, m, n, r, v, w, y, 
 z; the aspirated are formed by the breath, and are/, h, t, tk and th. 
 The sound of c is hard before a, o, u, r, t, and I: as, cart, cottage, 
 curious, craft, tract, cloth, &c., and when it ends a syllable ; as, 
 victim, &c. It has the soft sound before e, i, and y, as face, civil, 
 cymbal, mercy, &c. G is hard before a, o, u, I and r; as, game, 
 gone, gull, glory, grandeur; and also at the end of wordis ; as, bag, 
 nag, dog. But it has generally the soft sound before e, t and y ; as, 
 genius, ginger, Egypt. 
 
 4. What b a diphthong t What is a triphthong ? What is a pro> 
 per diphthong ? What is an improper diphthong '/ 
 
 3. 
 
 
ils, pronounced 
 in beat, ou in 
 se vowels, pro- 
 y, tew in yiew. 
 the vowels are 
 An improper 
 ed : as, the e of 
 
 consonant may be 
 e articulate sound, 
 lion of the breath 
 ith or any motion 
 ocal sound begins 
 
 rfectin itself, but 
 )d by a particular 
 ! consonants, if hen 
 admitting the in-* 
 improper to say, 
 a vowel without 
 youth. That they 
 ir regularly taking 
 dofu in saw, few, 
 sonants are distin- 
 pronouncing them 
 s are those formed 
 1 by the teeth ; as, 
 )m the throat j as, 
 le ; as, m, n. The 
 re are those whose 
 e impure are thos(? 
 short space ; as, b, 
 cal and aspirattd. 
 !, m, n, r, t>, w, y, 
 :/, A, s, th and th. 
 : as, cart, cottage, 
 is a syllable; as, 
 i y, as face, civil, 
 andr,' as, game, 
 )f words ; as, bag, 
 re e, t and y ; as, 
 
 ; ? What is a pro- 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Full many a gem of purest ray serene, 
 The dark unfathomed caves of ocean bear ; 
 Full many a flower is born to blush unseen, 
 And waste its sweetness in the desert air. 
 
 Down by yon woods where oaks llieir branches wave. 
 The bloom of youth fades with advancing years. 
 
 2. Vital spark of heavenly flame, 
 Quit, oh ! quit this mortal frame, 
 Trembling, hoping, lingeiing, flying. 
 Oh ! the pain, the bliss of dying. 
 Exalt the brave and idolize success. 
 
 The zealous mind is ever anxious to improve. 
 
 3. Earth, tear, boil, read, toil, pain, day. 
 Beauty, people, oil, new, always, react, die. 
 Guess, heroic, sound, taught, aunt, joy. 
 Coal, violet, bilious, adieu, poniard, coil. 
 Factious, lieu, speak, situation, down, 
 Foe, doubt, precimis, buy, dew, deceit. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 OF SYLLABLES AND WORDS. 
 
 1. A syllable is a sound, either simple or compound, 
 pronounced by a single impulse of the voice, and constitu- 
 ting a word, or part of a word ; as, a, an, ont. Spelling 
 is the art of rightly dividing words into their syllables, or 
 of expressing a word by its proper letters. 
 
 2. Words are articulate sounds used by common con- 
 flent as signs of our ideas. A word of one syllable is 
 termed a Monosyllable ; a word of two syllables, a 
 Dissyllable ; a word of three syllables, a Trisyllable ; 
 and a word of four or more syllables, a Polysyllable. 
 
 3. All words are either primitive or derivative. A 
 
 1 . Point out the vowels t Point out the consonants ? Point out the 
 words in which w and y, are vowels 1 In what words are they con« 
 sonants t And why f 2. Point out the mutes f Point out the 
 jemi-vowels and liquids 1 3. Point out the diphthongs in the abort 
 words 1 Point out tiie triphthongs 1 What are the words in which 
 two vowels come together, but do not form a diphthong 1 
 
 1. What is a syllable 1 What is spelling 1 2. What are words f 
 What is a monosyllable ? a dissyllable ? a trisyllable? a polysyllable t 
 3. What are all words ? What is a primitive word 1 What is a deri- 
 vative word 3 
 
; / 
 
 10 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 If 
 
 '■?■ 
 
 i- 1 
 
 
 n I 
 
 i 
 
 ! I 
 
 primitive word h that which cannot be reduced to any 
 simpler word in the language ; as, man, gcodf content, A 
 derivative word is t*^at which mav be reduced to another 
 word in English of greater simplicity ; as, handful ^ good' 
 ness, conienimemt. 
 
 Note. — A primitive word is the simplest form to which a word can 
 be reduced ; as, pen, tea, man. A derivative is a word compounded 
 of two or more primitive words, or derived from a primitive word ; 
 as, pen-knife, tea-cup, manly. Words are derived from each other 
 in various ways, viz. ; nouns arc derived from verbs ;,as, from to lovey 
 comes loecr ; to visit, visitor ; to survive, survivor y to act, aetor. 
 Verbs are derived from nouns ; as, from salt, to salt ; also from 
 adjectives and adverbs ; as, length, to lengthen ; short, to shorten ; 
 forward, to forward. Nouns are derived from adjectives ; as, from 
 white, whiteness ; good, qoodncss. Adjectives are derived from nouns ; 
 as, from health, healthy ; joy, joyful ; care, careless. Nouns are 
 also derived from other nouns ; us, from king, kingdom'f\aiw, lawyer ; 
 senate, senator. Adverbs arc derived from aidjecUves; as, from 
 slow, slowlit ; base, basely ; able, ably. 
 
 r 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Lo, the poor Indian ! whose untutored mind 
 Sees (»od in clouds, or hears him in the wind. 
 His soul proud science never taught lo stray 
 Far as the solar walk or milky-way. 
 
 2. And thou, who, mindful of the unhonored dead, 
 Dost in these lines their artless tale relate. 
 
 By night and lonely contemplation led 
 
 To wander in the gloomy walks of fate. 
 
 Hark ! how the sacred calm, that breathes around,. 
 
 Bids every fierce tumultuous passion cease. 
 
 3. Man, earth, healthy, oak, manhood, earthly. 
 Toil, careless, child, toilsome, joyful, fruit, 
 Joy, manful, childii::h, childhood, sin, kind, 
 Sinful, lover, kindness, white, fruitful, oaken* 
 Worth, whiteness, freedom, kingdom, beautiful, 
 Salt, shortness, saltish, good, goodness. 
 
 1. Point out the words containing but one syllable 1 What woitta 
 contain two or more syllables { 2. Point nut the monosyllables 7 the 
 dissyllables 7 the trisyllables 7 the polysyllables 1 3. Point out the 
 primitive words in the above section '( Point out the derivatiTt 
 words 7 From what are they derived 1 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY^ 
 
 m 
 
 jduced to any 
 dy conienU A 
 ced to another 
 kandful, good' 
 
 rhich a word can 
 vord compounded 
 I primitive word ; 
 I from each other 
 ;.as, from to love^ 
 »r } to act, aetor. 
 salt; also from 
 lort, to shorten f 
 ectires ; as, from 
 rived from nouns ; 
 ?ss. Nouns are 
 cm ; law, lawyer ; 
 ectives', as, froia 
 
 mind 
 wind, 
 stray 
 
 •red dead, 
 tte, 
 
 ihcs aroundf 
 
 ase. 
 
 irthly,. 
 
 liitf 
 
 ind,. 
 
 oaken« 
 
 )eaiitiful» 
 
 We 1 What word* 
 
 monosyllables 1 the 
 
 3. Point out the 
 
 out the derivatiTt 
 
 PART 11. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAPTfiR I. 
 
 The Parts of Spi 
 
 1 . The second part of Grammar i^ 
 treats of the different sorts of words, 
 cations, and their derivation. There^ 
 sorts of words, or, as they are commonlv^'li ybjfl p rgto Btf'^F 
 Speech ; namely, the Article, the StUnianitt^t^oun, 
 the Adjective, the Pronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the 
 Preposition, the Conjunction, and the Interjection, 
 
 1. An Article is a word prefixed to nouns io point 
 them out and show how far their signification extends; 
 as, a field, a house, an eagle, the woman. 
 
 2. The Substantive or Noun is the name of any thing 
 that exists, or of which, we l^ave any notion ; as, London, 
 man, virtue. 
 
 Note. — Whatever has a name is a noun. A noun, therefore, may 
 be known by asking the question. Is it the name of a thing t *1 he word 
 noun is more appropriate than substantive, because it is much more 
 general in its application; the latter in' its literal sense signifies something 
 that has tubstnnce. The words, idea, thought, tpirit, angel, be, 
 are not properly substantives, because they contain no substance, 
 nothing that we can hear, taste, feci ; but they arc nouns, because 
 they arc the names of certain things. 
 
 3. An Adjei'tive is a word added to a noun to express 
 its quality ; as, An industrious man ; a viituous woman. 
 
 Note.—'\n adjective simply expresses quality, and may be known 
 by its making sense witli the addition of the word thing ; as, a good 
 thing, a bad thinn; ; or of uny particular noun ; as, a wise man, an 
 hufi^le mind ; or by answering tu the question, Whatis^thc quality of 
 the noun ? as, ^ sweet apple ; What is the quality of the apple ? the 
 answer is sweet. 
 
 4. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun to 
 
 avoid the too frequent repetition of the same word ; as, 
 
 *^ The man is happy, he is virtuous, he is benevolent, he 
 
 \s useful." 
 
 Note. — In the above example tlie pronoun he voids the repetition 
 of the phrase tht man. Tl»c iidlowing are a few of the principal pro- 
 nouns ; /, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they, him, her, them, who. 
 
 1. What is the second part of Grammar, and of whsA does it treat 1 
 In English how many parts of speech, and what are they 1 
 
 I 
 
 1. What is an article 1 2. What 
 •djective 1 4. What ii a pronoun 1 
 
 is a noun 1 3. What is to 
 
T/. 
 
 12 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 : t 
 
 !i^' 
 
 !l t 
 
 5. A Verb is a word, which signifies, to be, to do, or to 
 »uffet ; as, I am, 1 rule, I am ruled. 
 
 Note. — A Verb may be more fully defined a word which exprcssea, 
 first, a state of being ^ as, to be, to live ; or, secondly, an action per- 
 formed by «pjne agent ; as, " Washington liberated his country ;" 
 ^ or, thirdly, tnejpeceiving of an action ; as, " Washington was loved 
 by his countryinen.'' A verb may be known by asking the question, 
 ^ Does the word express being, action, or the receiving of an action ;'* 
 if so, it is a verb. 
 
 6. An Adverb is a part of speech joined to a verb, an 
 adjective, and sometimes another adverb, to express 
 some quality or circumstance respecting them ; as, He 
 reads well ; a tntly good man ; he writes veri^ correctly. 
 
 iVo/ff.— The adverb may be generally known by its answering to 
 the question, how '{ as, he reads correctly ; how does he read 1 the 
 answer is correctly. The words, here, there, no, not, how, now, 
 often, justly, yes, why, more, most, are adverbs 
 
 7. Prepositions serve to connect words with one another, 
 and to show the relation between them ; as, " He went 
 from London to York," *« She is above disguise," " Thejr 
 are supported d^ industry." 
 
 ffote. — Any word, which shows the relative position of two oMects 
 is a preposition ; as, " The man descended into the well," " lie is 
 fttar the bottom," " Place the book m the table." Prepositions 
 nay be generally known by making sense with any of the personal 
 pronouns in the objective case aderthem : as, " with him, /or her, 
 by them, to you, in you, after them, on it, againat me," &c. 
 
 8. A Conjunction is a part of speech chiefly used to 
 connect sentences, so as out of two or more to malce 
 but one. It sometimes connects only words ; as, ** Tliou 
 and he are happy, because you are good ;" " Two and 
 tliree are five." 
 
 9. An Interjection is a word used to express some 
 passion or emotion of the speaker ; as, " O virtue ! how 
 amiable thou art !" " Jllas ! I fear ;" " ^A me ! 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The man, a boy, an apple, the book, the pen. 
 
 2. Men, the city, nation, the sun, an eagle, the moon, 
 
 virtue* fame, the night, a king. 
 
 .'). What is a verb 1 6. What is an adverb ? 
 7. What is a preposition 1 8. What is a coi^junction 1 9. What 
 ia an interjection 1 
 
 Qutttiont on the Exergue. — 1. Point out the ariiclct t 2. Point 
 out the nouns f 
 
STTMOLOCTr 
 
 10 
 
 , to be, to dOf or to 
 
 word which expressei, 
 condly, an action per- 
 )erated his country j" 
 Washington was loved 
 )y askuig the question, 
 Bceiving of an action ;'* 
 
 nined to a verb, an 
 dverb, to express 
 ing them ; as, He 
 ites very correctly. 
 ivn by its answering to 
 low does he read 1 the 
 e, nOy not, how, now, 
 bs 
 
 is with one another, 
 m ; as, " He went 
 e disguise," " Thev 
 
 position of two oMeeta 
 nto the well," " He is 
 
 table." Prepositions 
 ith any of the pereonal 
 s, " with him, /or her, 
 ainat me," &c. 
 ;ch chiefly used to 
 I or more to moke 
 words ; as, " Thou 
 ;ood}" "Two and 
 
 d to express some 
 ?, « O virtue ! how 
 " M me ! 
 
 ook, the pen, 
 
 on eagle, the moon^ 
 
 :oi\iunctiQn *? 9. What 
 the articles t 2. Point 
 
 3. A good man, a virtuous child, an humble mind, the 
 diligent scholar, a faithful friend. 
 
 4. He is the person, of whom I spoke ; we saw them ; 
 they were with you j she said it. 
 
 5. I love to read, he knows his lesson, they arrived, 
 John writes, the grass grows, the bird sings. 
 
 6. He acted wisely and prudently j does he read well t 
 No, not very well ; how seldom he comes ! 
 
 7. In the city, he gained it by labor, not for me, with 
 it and without it, he sold it to the man, on the table, from 
 his friend. 
 
 8. But, if you and your friend will go, I will also ; as 
 neither you nor I can perform it, yet he or his friend may 
 be able to do so. 
 
 9. Ah ! Alas! I fear for life ; virtue ! hark ! 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Of the Articles. 
 
 1. An Article is a word prefixed to a noun to point 
 it out and show how far its signification extends j as, a 
 fander, an eagle, the woman. Jn English there are but 
 two articles, a and the : a becomes an before a vowel, 
 and silent A ; as, an acorn, an hour ; but if the A be 
 ■ounded, the a only is used ; as, a hand, a heart, a high- 
 way. 
 
 2. Jl or an is styled the indefinite article, because it is 
 used in a vague sense to point out one single thing of the 
 kind ; as, " Give me a book ;" " Bring me an apple." 
 The is called the definite article, because it ascertains 
 what particular thing or things are meant ; as, " Give 
 Die the book ;" " Bring me the apples ;" meaning some 
 particular book or apples referred to. A noun without 
 ftn article to limit it is generally taken in its widest 
 lense ; as, " A candid temper is proper for man ;" that 
 kl, lor all mankind. 
 
 Quettiont on the Exercise. — 3. Point out the adjectives 1 4. Point 
 out the pronouns 1 5. Point out the pronouns, Tcrbs, and nouns 1 6. 
 Point out the adverbs t 7. Point out the prepositions and nouns Y 8. 
 feint out the conjunctions t 9. And interjections ? 
 
 Quettiont on tht Jirtkla. — 1. What is an article? In English 
 llpw many articles 1 What does a become before a vowel or siltnt h t 
 If the A is sounded, what is used ? 2. What is « or an atjltd 1 What 
 if Uu oalled 1 How ia a noun without an artida takan 1 
 
 A2 
 
 
I 
 
 i 
 
 1^ 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 CHAPTER Illi ' 
 
 Of the JSfoun. 
 
 1. A Substantive or Noun is the name of any 
 thing that exists, or of which we have any notion : as, 
 Citifi Virtue^ Fame. Nouns are of two. kinds,, either 
 proper or common. 
 
 2, Proper nouns are names appropriated to indivi* 
 
 duals : as, George,. London, Thames. Common nouns 
 
 are names which stand for species or kinds containing 
 
 many- sorts, or for sorts containing many individuals under 
 
 them : as, animal^ marif free. Nouns have a gender f 
 
 number, and case ; they are all of the second person 
 
 when spoken to, and of the third person when spoken of : 
 
 " John, recite your lesson ;" " I saw the man." 
 
 Note. — Proper nouns are names appropriated to individual persons 
 and particular places or things, which are not common to any particu- 
 lar class : as, John, James, Bostorii Paris. Common nouns are 
 those which comprehend various kinds under one particnlar. class ; 
 the word man is a common noun, because under that term Tarious 
 species or kinds are comprehended, and it is common to the whole 
 class of men. The noun tree is common, because there are many 
 kinds of trees ; animal .ia common for the same reason. When pro- 
 per nouns have an article annexed to them, they are used as com- 
 mon nonns : as, " He is the Cicero of his age ;" <' he is a Wathing^ 
 tort." When a common noun is particularly distinguished by aa 
 article or pronoun, it may be used to signify an individual : u, **tk» 
 boy is studious ;" " that girl is discreet.^' Some nouns are thus 
 distinguished : 1st. Collective nouns, or nouns of multitude : as, the 
 people, the parliament, the fled, the army. 2d. .^bttraet nouns : as, 
 tvhiteneas, goodness, knowledge. 3d. Verbal or participiaL nouns: 
 as, be^nning, ending, writing. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. A flower, a tree, an apple, an orange, the field, vir- 
 tue, temperance, a prince, the laws, beauty. 
 
 2. Washington, Europe, wisdom, America, the sun, 
 Boston, street, house, Baltimore, winter, heart, Gregory, 
 a volume, the stars, a book, Mary, Delaware, city, 
 animal, a country, Bristol. 
 
 Questions on th* Abtiiu.— 1. What is • noun t How many kinds 
 of nouns 1 
 
 2. What are proper nounet What are common nouns t What 
 have nouns F 
 
 Qutstions on Ksercise.-'l . Point out the articles and nouns 1 S. 
 Point out the proper and common nouns 1 ' 
 
ETTMOLOGT. 
 
 15 
 
 lame of anjr 
 y notion r as, 
 kinds,, either 
 
 ii\ to indivi- 
 >mnion nouns 
 /s containing^ 
 viduals under 
 ^e a gendcff 
 Bcond person 
 n spoken of: 
 
 dividual person* 
 1 to any particu- 
 mon nouns are 
 articular class ; 
 at term various 
 )n to the whole 
 there are many 
 n. When pro- 
 ! used as com- 
 ! is a Wa$hing' 
 nguished by aa 
 ilual : as, ** tht 
 nouns are thus 
 Ititude : as, the 
 raet nouns : as, 
 icipiai nouns : 
 
 he field, vir- 
 
 ca, the sun, 
 irt, Gregorj, 
 iware, city, 
 
 >w many. I 
 
 DOOM t Wbat 
 d nouMl S. 
 
 4 
 
 SECTION II. — Gender. 
 
 1. Gender is the distinction of nouns with regard to 
 sex. There are three genders, the Masculine, Feminine 
 and JiTevter, 
 
 2. The Masculine Gender denotes animals of the 
 male kind : as, a man, a horse, a king. The Feminine 
 Gender signifies animals of the female kind : as, a 
 woman, a qveen, a htn. The Neuter Gender denotes 
 objects whif h are neither males nor females : as, a field, 
 a house, a garden. Some nouns, naturally neuter, are 
 by a figure of speech converted into the masculine or 
 feminine gender: as, when we say of the sun, he is 
 setting ; and of a ship, she sails well. 
 
 NoU. — Nouns, which signify either males or femaleSf hate, what 
 is usually termed, the Common Gender ; because their,gender is co^i-. 
 jnon to both sexca ; as, parent, friend, servant, cousin. Figuratively 
 in English the Masculine Gender is given to noups which are con- 
 ■spicuous for their attributes of imparting or communicating, or which 
 are naturally strong and eflicacious. Those again are mads feminine, 
 which are conspicuous for their attributes of containing or bringing 
 forth, or which arc peculiarly beautiful or amiable. On these prin- 
 ciples the sun and timt arc said to be in the masculine gender; 
 whUe the moon, the earth, a ship, a city, a country, and virtue are 
 in the feminine genden 
 
 EXERCISR. 
 
 1. Mother, table, book, desk, woodj boy, wife, king, 
 lady, husband, tree, knife, cup, sea, lion, son, daughter, 
 lioness, fear, axe, aunt. 
 
 2. Parent, child, friend, servant, the earth, the sun, 
 the moon, virtue, Boston, France, Asia, Paris, spairow, 
 dove, face. 
 
 SECTION uu— of dumber. 
 1. Number is the consideration of an object as one or 
 more. Nouns have two numbers, the singular and the 
 plural. The iiingular number expresses but one object: 
 aa, a chair, a table. The plural number signifies more 
 objects than one : as, chairs, tables. 
 
 Question* on Gender.— 1. What is gender t How many genders 
 2. What is the masculine gender 1 The feminine 1 The neuter 1 Whi 
 is said of some nouns naturally neuter 1 
 
 Q}iestions on.Ex€reise.—l. What is the gender of the nouni ia 
 paragraph 1st. 2. What is the gender of parent, &c. 
 
 Qiustiont on Number.— 1 . What is number '( How many numbers 
 have nouns 1 What b the singular number 1 What is the plural 
 number ? 
 
 t 
 What 
 
r 
 
 16 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 I ! 
 
 II 
 
 Ml 
 
 2. Some nouns, from the nature of the things which 
 they express, are used only in the singular form : as, 
 wheat i goldf sloth, pride, &c. ; others only in the plural 
 form ; as, bellows, scissors, ashes, riches, &c. ; some are 
 the same in both numbers, as deer, sheep, swine. 
 
 3. The plural number of nouns is generally formed by 
 adding s to the singular: as, dove, doves ; face, faces j pen, 
 pens. But, when the singular ends in x, ch soft, sh,ss, or 
 s,ihe noun takes es in the plural : as, box, boxes ; church, 
 churches ; lash, lashes ; kiss, kisses ; chorus, choruses. If tho 
 noun ends in ch hard, the plural is formed by adding s : 
 9S monarch, monarchs. 
 
 4. Nouns endmg in / or fe are rendered plural by the 
 
 change of these terminations into ves ;"as, half, halves ; 
 
 loaf, loaves ; knife, knives ; except grief, relief, and some 
 
 others which have s ; those in ^ have s: as, muff, muffs. 
 
 Noun, swhich have y in the singular with no other vowel 
 
 in the syllable, change it into ies in the plural : as, beauty, 
 
 beauties ; fly, flies ; but the y is not changed when there is 
 
 another vowel in tne syllable : as,key, Arcys ; delay, delays. 
 
 Note. — Some nouns are rendered plural by the change of a into #, 
 
 man, men ; woman, women ; others by the change of oo into ee ;^ai, 
 
 foot, feet ; goose, geese ; ox and child, oxen and children. The 
 
 word news lis considered singular, and the noun means ii uied 
 
 bothnumbers. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1* Book, table, gloves, dollar, nail, trees, pen, canes, 
 horse, farms, river, cities, bank, streets, parent. 
 
 2. Box, foot, man, fly, goose, wife, ruff, calf, faith, 
 piety, temple, spy, deer, alms, pride, bird, house, flower, 
 poet, boy. 
 
 SECTION IV. — Case. 
 
 1. In English nouns have three cases, the .N'ominO' 
 
 tive, the Possessive, and t' e Objective. The nominative 
 
 Questions on^Number. — 2. How are some nounn used ? 3. How 
 ii the plural number of nouns formed ? When do nouns take tain the 
 plural ? 4. How are nouns ending inforfe rendered plural 1 What 
 are the exceptions t Nouns in y t 
 
 Questions on Exercise. — 1 . What is the number of the nouna in 
 paragraph Ist 1 2. Write the plural of the nouns in the 2d 1 
 
 Questions on Case. — 1. How many casei have nouiui? What \§ 
 the nominatire caac 1 
 
 ;«he 
 
ETTM0L06T. 
 
 n 
 
 he things which 
 igular form : as, 
 ily in the plural 
 , &c. ; some are 
 swine. 
 erally formed by 
 face, faces ; pen, 
 ch soft, «A ,55, or 
 , boxes ; church, 
 , choruses. If tho 
 ed by adding s : 
 
 red plural by the 
 
 as, half, halvet ; 
 
 relief, and some 
 
 as, muff, muffs. 
 
 1 no other vowel 
 
 ural : as, beauty, 
 
 pd when there is 
 
 If ; delay, delays, 
 
 change of a into «, 
 gc of 00 into ee ;J|af , 
 and children. Tht 
 lun mtant is uied 
 
 'ees, pen, canes, 
 
 arent. 
 
 ruflT, calf, faith, 
 
 I, house, flower, 
 
 3, the J^omina- 
 
 The nominative 
 
 IS used 7 3. How 
 louns take <«in the 
 ercd plural % What 
 
 ter of the nouni in 
 in the 2d % 
 
 ) nouiui? What if 
 
 ffcase simply expresses the name of a thing, or the subject 
 |of the verb : as, " The boy plays," " the girls learn.'* 
 i 2. The possessive case expresses the relation of proper- 
 |ty or possession, and may be known by having generally 
 fan apostrophe with the letter s coming after it : as, " My 
 '^father's house," " the scholar's duty." When the plural 
 ends in «, the other s is omitted, but the apostrophe is 
 retained : as, " On eagles' wings," " the drapers'' com- 
 pany." When the singular ends in ss or *, the apostro- 
 'phic s is oftenomitted : as, " For goodness^ sake,"" James^ 
 book," " Thomas'' hat." 
 
 3. The objective case expresses the object of an action 
 or of a relation, and generally follows a verb active or a 
 preposition: as, "John assists Charles,* "they live in 
 London.** 
 
 Note. — Nouns in English are thus declined : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nominative. A mother. Mothers. 
 
 Possessive. A mother's, Mothers'. 
 
 Objective. A mother, Mothers. 
 
 Nominative. Tho man, Men. 
 
 Possessive. The man's Men's. 
 
 Objective. The man, Men. 
 
 Exercise on Case. 
 1. Charles reads his lesson. The cars have arrived in 
 ^he city. John lost his brother's cap. The wrath of 
 Peleus* son. The author wrote a book. The child tore 
 the book. The boy plays with a ball. Thomas broke 
 John's cane. Peace of mind is virtue's reward. The 
 president's chair. Virtue rewards her followers. Csisar 
 fonquered Pompey. 
 
 i 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Of the Jldjective. 
 
 1. An Adjective is a word added to a noun to expreii 
 Ha quality : as, An industrious man, a benevolent mind. 
 In English the adjective is not varied on account of gen- 
 der, number, or case : as, a careless boy, careless girls. 
 The only variation, which it admits, is that of the degrees 
 
 Quesf tons on Case. — 2. What is the posBessive t When is the'other 
 t omitted ? 3. What is the objective case 1 Decline mother t man 1 
 
 QtMsfio/w on Exeiciae. — 1. Point out the nominative caies t Tht 
 poHeuive cases 1 The objective cases '{ 
 
 i 
 
C:] 
 
 t ! 
 
 H 
 
 ■' if 
 
 li ! 
 
 
 t8 
 
 INGUSH GKAMtf AR. 
 
 of comparison. There are commonly reckoned three 
 degrees of comparison, namely, the Pcsitive^ Comparativcy 
 and Super Iniive, 
 
 2. The Positive state expresses the quality of an object 
 without any increase or diminution : as, good, wise, great- 
 The comparative degree increases or lessens the positive 
 in signification : as, wiser, greater, less wise. The super- 
 lative increases or lessens the positive to the highest or 
 lowest degree : as, wisest, greatest, least raise. 
 
 3. The Comparative is formed by adding r or er to the 
 positive : as, wise, wiser ; great, grea/cr ; aad the eui^crla- 
 tive by adding stor est : as, wise, wisest ; great, greatest. 
 The adverbs more and most, placed before the adjective, 
 have the same eifect : as, more wise, most wise. 
 
 4. Monosyllables, for the most, are compared by er and 
 est ; and dissyllables by more aod most : as, mild, milder, 
 mildest ; frugal, tnore frugal, most frugal. Some words 
 have an irregular comparison : as, good, belter, best; bad, 
 worse, worst;. Utile, less, leait; much, or many, more, 
 most ; and a few others. When an adjective, with the 
 definite article before it, is used without a noun, it is taken 
 as a noun : as. The virtuous are always happy j Provid- 
 ence rewards the good and punishes the bad. 
 
 Note. — The termination ish is sometimes employed as a degree of 
 comparison, and tends to diminish the signification below the positive: 
 n$, black, blackish. ; salt, saltish. The word rather expresses a sma^ 
 degree, or excess of quality : as, '' She is rather profuse in her ex- 
 penses." In comparing two things the superlative should never be 
 employed; these expressions, <' the wisest of the two;" " the eldett, 
 the best of the two," he. are improper ; it should be '' the tviter, the 
 elder, and the better of the two." The same noun may be qualified 
 by several adjectives in the same sentence : as, << a true, vtr/uout, and 
 benevolent man. Adjectives that have in thamselves a superlative 
 ■ignification do not admit of the degrees of comparison : as chief, 
 extreme, supreme, right : chiefest, extremest, rightest, be., are im- 
 proper. Various nouns placed before other nouns express some 
 quality, and may be considered as adjectives in that position : as, se^ 
 fiih, icftTM-vessel, uiindoto-glasa, ^nrpowder, corn-field, lie. Ad- 
 
 Quettioni on the Adjective. — 1 . What is an adjective t In Eng^ih 
 what is said of the adjective 1 What variation does it admit 1 2. Wh«i 
 is the positive 1 the comparative 1 the superlative Y 3. How ii this 
 comparative^formed 1 How is the superlative formed 1 Whet effect 
 kave mere and most f 4. How are monosyllables and diasylleblef 
 compared t What worde have en irregular comperiionl /Wfacn ji ap. , 
 •Elective takon u e noun 7 
 
BTVMOLOGT. 
 
 19 
 
 reckoned three 
 'e^ Comparativct 
 
 lity of an object 
 oodf wise, great . 
 ens the positive 
 ise. The super- 
 
 the highest or 
 wise, 
 ngr or er to the 
 aadthe 8U])eria- 
 
 great, greatest. 
 •e the adjective, 
 t wise. 
 
 ipared by rrand 
 as, mild, milder, 
 . Some words 
 elttr, bests bad, 
 or many, more, 
 ective, with the 
 noun,it is taken 
 happy J Provid- 
 
 oyed as a degree of 
 below the positive : 
 '.r expresses a sma|l 
 profuse in her ei- 
 ve should never be 
 wo j'» " the eUett, 
 be " the wiser, the 
 n may be qualified 
 itise, virtuous, tni 
 elves a superlative 
 (iparison: as chief, 
 itest, file., are im- 
 luns express some 
 t position : as, Hf^~ 
 -n^field, lie. Ad- 
 
 ectivel InEngysh 
 it admit 7 2. Wh^ 
 t 3. How is ths 
 ned? What effect 
 les and dissyllablef 
 risonl \S^heii|iap.. 
 
 •a: 
 
 jectives expressing number are called numeral abjcctives, of wfaidi 
 there are two kinds ; the cardinal : as, two, three, four, &c. ; and the 
 ordinal: as, first, second, third, &c. Adjectives derived from parti- 
 ciples are called participial adjectives : as, " a loifijig child," " a 
 htated imagination." 
 
 Exercise on the Adjective. 
 
 1. A sweet apple, A good and wise man, A strong 
 body. Verdant fields, A happy parent, A peaceful mind; 
 A mutual agreement, A rapid and limpid stream, A senr 
 Bualmind, An obdurate heart, Tender feelings. Composed 
 thoughts, A woman amiable, A better world. An obedient 
 son, Shady trees, A fragrant flower,. Steamboat, An ap- 
 ple pie, A wine glass. 
 
 2. High, Wise, Sweet, Happy, Noble, Short, Elegant, 
 Magnificent, Candid, Unfortunate, Good, Little, Bad, 
 Chief, Extreme, Thin, Full, Proper, Disastrous, Cooling, 
 Two, Three, Six, Nine, Firtjt, Second. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Of Pronouns. 
 
 1; A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun to 
 avoid the too frequent repetition of the same word : as, 
 " The man is happy, Ae is benevolent, he is useful." 
 There are three kinds of pronouns, namely the Personal, 
 the Relative, and the Jldjedive Pronoun, 
 
 SECTION i. — Of Personal Pronoun9, 
 
 1 . There are three Personal Pronouns, namely, /; thou ; 
 he, she, or it ; with their plurals we ', ye or you ; they. 
 
 2. Personal pronouns admit o( person, number, gender, 
 and ease. The persons are three in each number, namely : 
 
 /, is the first person, 
 
 Thou, is the second person. 
 
 He, she, or it, is the third person. 
 
 We, is the first person. 
 
 Ye or you, is the second person. ^ Plural. 
 
 Thev, is the third person. 
 
 3. Pronouns have two numbers, the singular and p|u- 
 
 (iuestioM on Exercise. — 1.. Point out the adjectives, and tell wliai 
 nouns they qualify 1 2. Compare the above adjectives 1 What adj«e- 
 tives are net compared 1 ^ 
 
 Questions on Pronouni.— What is a pronoun ? How many Mud* 
 of proDounel 
 
 isi 
 
 
 Singular, 
 
i! 
 
 •I 
 
 ! 
 1 
 
 ''( I 
 
 11 
 
 ^ . 
 
 I . 
 
 
 ,| i; 
 
 I 
 
 h 
 
 
 'it ] 
 
 '■ 
 
 ; * i 
 
 1 L 
 
 J 
 
 1*^, 
 
 10 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ral J as, /, Mow, he, we, ye or you, they. Gender hat 
 respect only to the third person singular : as, he^ she, it. 
 He is masculine, she is femine, and it is neuter. 
 
 4. Personal pronouns have three cases — the nomina 
 tive, possessive, and objective : they are thus declined : 
 
 Person. 
 
 Case. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 FirsU 
 
 J^om, 
 
 I. 
 
 We. 
 
 
 Poss. 
 
 Mine. 
 
 Ours. 
 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Me. 
 
 Us. 
 
 Second, 
 
 J^om, 
 
 Thou 
 
 Ye or you. 
 
 
 Poss, 
 
 Thine. 
 
 Yours. 
 
 
 Obj, 
 
 Thee. 
 
 You. 
 
 Third 
 
 JN'om, 
 
 He. 
 
 They. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Poss. 
 
 His. 
 
 Theirs. 
 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Him 
 
 Them. 
 
 Third 
 
 J^om, 
 
 She. 
 
 They. 
 
 Fern, 
 
 Poss, 
 
 Hers. 
 
 Theirs. 
 
 
 Obj, 
 
 Her. 
 
 Then. 
 
 Third 
 
 Jfom. 
 
 It. 
 
 They. 
 
 Jfeut, 
 
 Poss, 
 
 Its. 
 
 Theirs. 
 
 
 Obj. 
 
 It. 
 
 Thera. 
 
 Note. — The objective of the pronoun has in general a form different 
 from that of the nominative or possessive case. Personal pronouns, 
 compounded with the word self, arc called compound personal pro- 
 nouns; they are employed to denote emphasis, or distinction, and they 
 are used either in the nominative or objective cases only : as, " he came 
 himself;*' " I saw the person himself;'' "she herself -nxW doit;" 
 « this is the book itself;'^ and in the plural, " they themselves per- 
 formed it," we heard from the men themselves." 
 
 SECTION 11 — Of Relative Pronouns . 
 
 1. Relative Pronouns are such as relate in general to 
 some word or phrase going before, which is thence called 
 the antecedent ; they are who, which, and that: as, " The 
 man is happy who lives virtuously." 
 
 Questions on Personal Pronouns. — 1. How many personal pro- 
 nouns 1 2. Of what do they admit t How many are the persons, asd 
 what are they 1 3. How many numbers have pronouns 1 What is stid 
 of gender? 4. How many cases have pronouns ? Decline tb* pro- 
 nouns in both numbers '{ 
 
 Quations on Relaiive Pronouns. — 1 . What are relative pronovm f 
 
y; 
 
 ITTM0L06T. 
 
 31 
 
 ly. Gender has 
 : as, he, she, it. 
 neuter. 
 
 s — the nomina 
 thus declined : 
 
 Plural. 
 
 IVe. 
 
 Durs. 
 
 Us. 
 
 Jfe or you. 
 
 ifouii. 
 
 You. 
 
 They. 
 
 Theirs. 
 
 rhem. 
 
 rhey. 
 
 rheirs. 
 
 'hPii. 
 
 ;hey. 
 
 'heirs. 
 
 'hem. 
 
 Tal a Torm differeot 
 *ersonal pronouns, 
 tnd personal pro- 
 istinction, and thej ' 
 nly : as, " he came 
 iraelfmW doil;»» 
 |r thenuelvti p«r- 
 
 ! in general to 
 3 thence called 
 ifl/.-as, « The 
 
 ny personal pro- 
 ! the persons, asd 
 nslWhatissttd 
 Decline tfaa pro- 
 
 ilativepronoms f 
 
 What is a kind of compound relative including both 
 ;]the antecedent and the relative, and is mostly equivalent 
 |to that which : as, " This is what I wanted ;" that is to 
 Isay, the thing which I wanted." 
 
 2. Who is applied to persons, which to animals and in- 
 animate things : as, " He ha. friend, who is faithful in 
 
 ^adversity :" *' The bird, which sung so sweetly, is flown ;" 
 I " This is the treCt which produces no fruit." 
 
 That, as a relative, is often used to prevent the too 
 
 frequent repetition of who and which. It is applied to 
 
 both persons and things : as, " He that acts wisely de- 
 
 i ■ deserves praise :" " Modesty is a qxiality that highly adorns 
 
 a woman." 
 
 3. Who is of bo*h numbers, and is thus declined : 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 J^ominative, Who. 
 
 Possessive. < Whose. 
 
 Objective. Whom. 
 
 Who, which, and what are called Interrogatives, when 
 they areused in asking questions : as, " Who is he ?" 
 " Which is the book ?" « What are you doing?" 
 
 SECTION in. — Of Mjective Pronouns. 
 
 1. Adjective Pronouns are of a mixed nature, partici- 
 pating of the properties both of pronouns and adjectives. 
 
 The adjective pronouns may be subdivided into four 
 sorts ; namely, the possessive, tiie distributive, the de- 
 monstrative, and the indefinite. 
 
 The possessive are those which relate to possession or 
 property. 
 
 There are seven of them, viz., my, thy, his, her, oxtr, 
 your, their. 
 
 Mine and thine, instead of my and thy, were formerly 
 used before a substantive or adjective beginning with a 
 vowel or a silent h : as, " Blot out all mine iniquities.'* 
 
 Questions on Relative Pronouns. — 2. What is said of what f 
 To what are who and which applied 1 What is said oC that t 3* 
 What number is who 7 Decline it '{ What are who, which, and wha^ 
 ealled when used in asking questions ? 
 
 Questions on Mjective Pronouns. — 1. What are a(\jective pro- 
 nouns ? How are thiey divided 1 What are the possessive ? 
 
' i 
 
 [T 
 
 .} i-i 
 
 \ I 
 
 i-'^t 
 
 22 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 2. The di&tributive are those which denote the per- 
 sons or tilings that make up a number, as taken separ- 
 ately and singly. They are each^ every, either: as, 
 *< Each of his brothers is in a favorable situation ;" 
 " Every man must account for himself j" " I have not 
 seen either of them." 
 
 3. The demonstrative are those which precisely point 
 out the subjects to wliicli they relate : Mm and thaty 
 these and thoscf are of this class : as, " This is true 
 charity, that is only its image." 
 
 This refers to the nearer person or thing, and thai to 
 xhe more distant: as, " This man is more intelligent 
 than ihat?^ This indicates the latter, or last mentioned ; 
 ihaii the former, or first mentioned ; as, Wealth and pover- 
 ty are both temptations ; that tends to excite pride, this^ 
 discontent." 
 
 4. The indefinite are those which express their sub- 
 jects in an indefinite or general manner. The following 
 are of this kind : *o7we, otheTy anyy one, all, suchf &c. 
 
 Other and one are declined in the following manner :, 
 Singular. Flural. Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. other. others. one. ones. 
 
 Poss. other's. others.' one's, • nes'. 
 
 Obj. other, others. one. ones. 
 
 Note. — 1 he words ovm and self are frequently added to the posset-, 
 •ive adjective pronouns ; tlicy are used to express emphasis or opposi- 
 tion : as, " I live in my own house ;" that is, the house belongs to 
 me, not a hired house ; " 1 myself will do it ;'* that is, " no other, 
 person j" * We may blame ourselves^* " It is her cum book/' " It 
 IS their own fault," kc. ; these are called compound adjective pronouna. 
 The words former and latter may be properly ranked among the 
 demonstrative pronouns : as, " John and Thomas are rival class- 
 mates ; the former possesses the better judgement, the latter, the better 
 memory." 
 
 EXERCISE — On Pronouns. 
 
 1. I wrote to him ; You know that we sent it to them ; 
 They told her ; She gave it to me ; 1 hey sold it for more 
 ^an, its. value ; He read his lesson to us; Ye should learn. 
 
 QuetHons on Mjective Pronouns. — 2. What arc the distributiTe 
 pronouns 1 3. AVhat are the demonstrative 1 4. What are the inde- 
 finite 1 Decline other and one. ■ 
 
 Questions on Exercise. — 1 . Point out the[penonal pronouju, an4 
 tell their number uud case 111 ' 
 
 I 
 
 jloni 
 je CO 
 iatf( 
 
 le? 
 3. 
 
 Iiouse 
 
 t>vvn 
 
 fell'; 
 
 This 
 and a 
 
 flBN^.1 
 
I denote the per- 
 38 taken separ- 
 'ery^ either: as, 
 rable situation ;" 
 fj" «1 have not 
 
 h precisely point 
 this and ihat^ 
 " This is true 
 
 ling, and thai to 
 
 more intelligent 
 
 last mentioned ; 
 
 '^ealth and pover- 
 
 Jxcite pride, Mw, 
 
 cpress their sub- 
 The following 
 z//, such, &c. 
 
 owing manner :; 
 lar. Plural. 
 
 ones. 
 • nes'. 
 ones. 
 
 added to the posset- 
 emphasis or opposi- 
 he house belongs to 
 * that is, " no other 
 T own book,'* « It 
 adjective pron&unt. 
 ranked among the 
 as are rival class< 
 the latter, the better 
 
 sent it to them ; 
 
 sold it for more 
 
 life should learn. 
 
 arc the distributive 
 What are the inde- 
 
 )nal pronouns, an<) 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 2. The man who sent it ; The person to whom it 
 jlongs ; The book which 1 sent ; The lady whose name 
 je could not recollect ; The hoy that brought it; The house 
 lat fell down ; He has brought what I wanted ; Who i» 
 
 ie? What is that ? Which is the way? 
 
 3. My book j His lesson ; Thy hat ; Her desk ; Our 
 jhouse ; Your duty ; Their farm ; My own hat ; It is their 
 !>wn business ; We ourselves will go ; I will bring it my- 
 lelf; Her task is performed ; My cane is at your house ; 
 This man ; That book ; These boys ; Those apples ; One 
 and all must go ; Some person ; No thing. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Of the Verb. 
 
 SECTION 1 — Of the nature of Verbs. 
 
 1. A Verb is a word which signifies, to be, to i/o^ 
 or to suffer: as, I «m, I rule, I am ruled. Verbs are of 
 three kinds ; namely, jJctive, Passive, and Neuter. Tiiey 
 ire also divided into Regular, Irregular, and Defective. 
 
 2. A Verb Active expresses action, and always implies 
 an agent, and generally an object acted upon : as, lotovef 
 «* I love my parents ;" " John recites his lesson." Tho 
 active verb is either transitive or intransitive. 
 
 An active-transitive verb expresses action which passes 
 from the agent over to some other object : as, ** The 
 tutor instructs his pupils ;" " I esteem the man i*'* 
 ** Emily loves her mother.'''^ 
 
 An active-intransitive verb expresses an action whicf^ 
 is confined to the agent, and has no effect upon any ex- 
 ternal object : as, to walk, to run, to fly ; " the man walks ;'* 
 the boy runs ;" the birds j/?y." 
 
 3. A Verb Passive expresses passion, or the receiving 
 of some action or impression by the nominative or agent ; 
 
 Qnestions on Exercise. — 2. Point out the Relative prenoun& and the 
 nouns to which they relate 1 Point out the interro^atives ? 3. Point 
 out the possessive pronouns ? Point out the compound adjective pru'* 
 nouns 1 Point out the demonstrative 1 and the indefinite t 
 
 Questions on the Verb^ — 1. What is. a. verb'? How many kinds of 
 rerbs, and how are they divided I 2. What is a verb active 1 What .is 
 •aid of the \erbi active '{ What does an active-transitive verb express t 
 What does w. activ^-intraiiaitiyQ verl» express ? 3. Wbat i« « \^f:h 
 passive t 
 
m 
 
 M 
 
 1l 
 
 2i 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 as, to be loved ; " Emily is loved by her mother j" *' the 
 man was discharged.'** 
 
 4. A Verb Neuter expresses neither action nor passion, 
 but simply being, or a state of being : as, I a»i, I sleep, I 
 fit. 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs are those by the aid of which the 
 other English verbs are principally conjugated ; they are 
 do, be, have, shall, will, may, and can, with their varia- 
 tions ; and let, when used as an auxiliary, and must, 
 which have no variation. 
 
 Note. — The above division appears to be the most consistent with 
 the definition and nature of the verb. An active verb expresses action, 
 and conveys to the mind the idea of motion ; the passive verb ex- 
 presses passion or the receiving of some action or impression by tho 
 nominative ; but the neuter expresses neither action nor the receiving 
 of an action ; therefore, to call the verbs, to walk, to run, to fly, to 
 •wim, Sec, neuter, would seem to be contrary to the deflnition of.a 
 neuter verb, because they give the idea of action or motion. They ex- 
 press action, but do not generally admit after them the objective ca«c ; 
 they are denominated intrantitive, to distinguish them from those verbs 
 which admit an object after them. An active-transitive verb, that has 
 no immediate object after it, may be taken as intransitive : as, " he 
 mCoes the book ;" the verb is transitive ; *' he moves forward ;" the 
 rerb is intransitive. An active-transitive verb n»ay be known by 
 observing that the action always passes from Uie nominative to some 
 object : as, " John assists Charles." The intransitive may be known 
 by the action being always confined to its nominative, without aflccting 
 any object: as, *• John walks." The passive may be known by the 
 action always passing from some other object to the nominattve ; as, 
 *' John is assisted by Charles ;" and tjjc neuter verb, by expressing 
 limply a state of being without action or motion ; as, " John stands.*' 
 
 EXERCISE — On Verbs, 
 
 1. ^c/. Trans. Verb. Virtue rewards her followers ; 
 Sarah loves her parents; She wrote a letter; Charles 
 nbuses Saiuuel ; The man assists me ; I removed the 
 books; John sold tho knife ; James bought it ; Send them 
 tome; The trees bear apples; Caisar conquered Pom- 
 pey. 
 
 2. Jld. Intrans. Verbs. The ship sails ; the fish 
 Nvvim ; the boy runs ; the birds fly ; the man walks ; tho 
 rain falls ; the enrth revolves; he reflects. 
 
 Questions on the Verb. — 4. AVhat is a verb neuter 7 What are 
 auxiliary verbs, and what are they '{ 
 
 Q*i*stions on the Exercise. — 1. Point nut the verbs, and tell their 
 nominatiioa and^the object after them t 2. Point out the iutrantitire 
 verbs i 
 
 3. 
 
 JjvritU 
 
 frere 
 een 
 
 |hey 
 
 ■'? 5. 
 
 ^''-K 
 
ETTlfOLOGT. 
 
 t5 
 
 er mother j" *' the 
 
 action nor passion, 
 IS, I am, I sleep, I 
 
 fiid of which the 
 
 jugated ; they are 
 
 with their varia- 
 
 ciliary, and must, 
 
 most consistent with 
 verb expresses action, 
 the passive verb cx- 
 or impression by tho 
 ition nor the receiving 
 vallc, to run, to fly, lo 
 to the definition of.n 
 or motion. They ex- 
 Em the objective ca«» ; 
 them from those verbs 
 ansitive verb, that has 
 intransitive : as, "he 
 moves forward ;" the 
 b may be known by 
 ic nominative to some 
 nsitivc may be known 
 itivc, without aflTecting 
 lay be known by the 
 > the nominattve ; as, 
 r verb, by expressing 
 ; as, " John stands." 
 
 • 
 
 rds her followers ; 
 a letter; Charles 
 
 ; I removed the 
 ght it ; Send thoni 
 
 conquered Pom- 
 
 p sails ; the fish 
 e man walks ; tho 
 ;ts. 
 
 rb neuter 7 What are 
 
 e verbs, and tell their 
 lit out the iatranutir* 
 
 First Person. 
 Second Person. 
 
 Thud Person. 
 
 3. Passive Verbs, Sarah is loved ; the letter was 
 |«rritten j Charles is abused ; I am assisted ; the books 
 Jfvere removed ; the slate was ; broken the knives have 
 seen sold ; Pompcy was conquered. 
 I 4. J^euter Verbs. I am j he stands ; the men sleep j 
 Jpey lie ; she sits; they seem. 
 
 • 5. Promiscuous. They know him ; the glass is bro- 
 ken ; Henry stands ; he struck the horse ; the boy goes 
 :home ; he runs j Emily is loved ; pay the boy j they sit ; 
 tlie child sleeps. 
 
 SECTION II — OfJ^vmber and Verson, 
 
 1. Verbs have two numbers, the Singular and Plural: 
 as, "I run, we run." In each number there are three 
 persons: as, 
 
 Sin^lar. Plural. 
 
 1 love. We lore. 
 
 Thou lovest. Ye or You love. 
 
 He, she, or it lovesThey love. 
 Note. — The verb in the three persons plural has, in general, the 
 Mune termination as the iirst person singular ; the second and third 
 p^sons singular only vary in termination. 
 
 SFXTioN III — Of Moods and Paiticiples. 
 
 1. Mood or Mode is a particular form of the verb, 
 •hovving the manner in which the being, action,or passion, 
 ii represented. 
 
 • There are five moods of verbs, viz. the Indicative, the 
 Imperative, tho Potential, the Subjunctive, and the 
 Injiniiive. 
 
 •. Tiio Indicative Mood simply indicates or declares a 
 thing: as, " Ho loves ; he is loved ;" or it asks a question ; 
 IS, '• Docs 1)0 love ? Is ho loved 1" 
 
 The Imperative Mood is used for commanding, exhort- 
 ing, entreating, or permitting; as, " Depart thou; mind 
 Vj ; let us stay ; go in peace." 
 
 The Potential Mood implies possibility or liberty, power, 
 
 Qucsliom on the Exercise. — 8. Point out the passive verbs ^ 4^ 
 The neuter verbs ? 5. Point out th(^ active, passive, and neuter verbs 1 
 
 Qui'stiont on Number.— I. What have verbs » How many persona ? 
 
 • (^stions on Mood. — 1. What is mood? What is the number of 
 the moods • 2 AVhat is Uic indicative mood ^ The imperative ? The 
 ^Veutial < 
 
^ii 
 
 H 
 
 26 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 will, or obligation ; as, " It may rain ; he may go or 
 ttay ; I can ride ; he would walk ; they should learn." 
 
 3. The Subjunctive Mood represents a thing under a 
 condition, motive, wish, supposition, &c. ; and is preceded 
 by a conjunction expressed or understood, and attended 
 by another verb : as, " I will respect him, though he chide 
 me ;" " Were he good, he would be happy :" that is, " t/ 
 he were good." 
 
 The Infinitive Mood expresses a thing in a general and 
 unlimited manner without any distinction of number or 
 person : as, " to act, to speak, to be feared." 
 
 The participle is a certain form of the verb, and de- 
 rives its name from its not only participating, the proper 
 ties of a verb, but also those of an adjective : as, " i air 
 desirous of knowing hi in ;" " Mmired and applauded. 
 he became vain ;" " Having finished\m work, he submit- 
 tedit ;'* &.c. 
 
 There are three Partiri[)les, the Present or Active, the 
 Perfect or Passive, and the compound Perfect ; or »* lov 
 jng, loved, having loved." 
 
 NoU. — The imperative mood in its literal sense implies a com- 
 mand ; it must, however, be employed on occasions cf a very diflercnt 
 nature, oflen to express ihc humblest supplication of an inferior bein^ 
 to one who is intinitely his superior ; as, " Give us this day ou; 
 daily bread ; txixA forgive us our trespasses." 
 
 Participles convey un iiloii of lime, nnd also signify action ; but, if 
 from the participles wv tnUc iuvay the idea of time, they simply ezpresi 
 quality, and are called partici|)ial adjeetivrs ; us, " Writing to a friend ; 
 moving' in haste ; heated with wine ;" here the words writing, moving. 
 and lieated, are participles, caiivcyiiiK a reference to the time at which 
 the actions were performed ; but in the following sentences they arr 
 adjectives; *' toritine; pa|)cr ; a lauvi'r)? spectacle ; a /ica/ctf imagina- 
 tion." Every present participle in English ends in ing : as, reading, 
 doing, flying, &lc. 
 
 SECTION IV — Of Tense. 
 
 1. Tense, being the distinction of time, might seem to 
 ndmit only of the present, past, and future ; but, to mark 
 it more accurately, it is made to consist of six variations; 
 viz, the Present^ the Impeifedy the Perfect, the Pluper- 
 fect, and the First and Second Future Tenses, 
 
 Qntttioni on Mood. — 3. What is the subjunctive ^ The infinitife* 
 What is a participle 1 Their number ? 
 
 Quutiofu on Tenat.—l . What is said of tense, and what on; tbej ' 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 ft7 
 
 n ; he may go or 
 ey should learn." 
 \\s a thing under a 
 ,c. ; and is preceded 
 itood, and attended 
 [n, though he chido 
 lappy :" that is, " i} 
 
 ng in a general and 
 'lion of number or 
 a red." 
 
 ■ the verb, and de- 
 ipating, the proper 
 eclive : as, *' I a in 
 ed and applauded. 
 is work, he submit 
 
 isent or Active, the 
 Perfect : or '* !ov 
 
 sense implies a cnm- 
 sions cf a very different 
 inn of an inferior bein^' 
 
 Give us this day our 
 
 I signify action ; but, if 
 
 ine, they simply express 
 " Writing to a friend ; 
 
 vf)rd8 Writing, moving. 
 
 CO tu the time nt which 
 iiig sentences thry arc 
 ■!c ; a healed imagina- 
 i\$ in ing : as, reading, 
 
 se, 
 
 me, might seem to 
 itiirc ; but, to mark 
 t of Kix variations ; 
 effect, the Pluper 
 ' Tenses, 
 ictivc ' The infinitive * 
 
 ise, and what arc tbej ' 
 
 ' 2. The Present Tense represent an action or event as 
 
 f issing at the time in which it is mentioned : as, *' I rule } 
 am ruled; I think; I fear." 
 I The Imperfect Tense represents the action or event* 
 fither as past and finished, or as remaining unfinished at a 
 pertain time past : as, " I loved her for her modesty and 
 firtue ;" " They were travelling post when he met them." 
 3. The perfect Tense not only refers to what is past, 
 but also conveys an allusion to the present time : as, " I 
 have finished my letter ;" " I have seen the person that 
 was recommended to me." 
 
 The Pluperfect Tense represents a thing not only as 
 past, but also as prior to some other point of time specified 
 in the sentence ; as, " I had finished my letter before he 
 arrived." 
 
 4. The first Future Tense represents the action as yet 
 to come, either with or without respect to the precise time 
 when : as, " The sun will rise tomorrow ;" " I shall see 
 them again." 
 
 The second Future intimates that the action will be 
 fully accomplished at or before the time of another 
 ftiture action or event: as,*'*! shall have dined at one 
 o^clock ;" " The two houses will have finished their 
 business when the king comes (o prorogue them." 
 
 Note', — The presunt tense is sometimes used in reference to person* 
 long since dead, whose writings arc still extant at the present time : 
 •B, " Seneca reusom and moralizes well," " Job sj)ealc» feelingly in hia 
 afflictions." The present tcns<; preceded by the words, when, beforty 
 m soon as, Sic, is soniotimos used to point out the relative time of a 
 ftlturc action : as, '•' W/ien he arrives he will hear the news ;" " He 
 Will hear the news before he arrives, or as toon as he arrives." In 
 animated historical narrations thi» tense \h sometimes used for the 
 imperfect: as, ''lie enters the territory of his enemies, yigA<« and 
 . conquers, takes an iniin<!nse booty, and returns to enjoy a triumph." 
 The imperfect and perfect tenses both den')te past actions ; but they 
 iUTer from rach other with rej^urd to th*; time in which the actions 
 were performed. The imperfect denotes the action performed within 
 • period of time, which haw entirely passed aw.iy, without any regard 
 to the length of the period: a.s, "The ancient philosophers vnot% 
 learnedly on many subject.'?. The philosophers of the last century 
 made great discoveries ; I wrote lost year ; I taw the man last week \ 
 he went yesterday." 
 
 Qfiestiont on Tense.— 2. What is the pit-sent tense ? the imperfect % 
 8. What is the perfect ? the pluperfect i 4. What is the first future 
 kiuo '{ the second future 1 
 
2$ 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ,' 1,1 
 
 The perfect tense denotes the action performed within a period of 
 time, of which period there is still a portion to pass away : as, 
 " Modem philosophers have tvritten more extensively ; the philosopher! 
 of the present age have made still greater discoveries ; I have written 
 this year ; I have seen the man this weeA; ; he has returned to-day.'* 
 
 SECTION V — Of the Conjugation of the Verb, 
 1. The conjugation of the verb is the regular combin- 
 ation and arrangement of its several numbers, persons, 
 moods, and tenses. 
 
 The conjugation of the active verb is styled the ,^ctive 
 Voice ; and that of the passive verb, the Passive Voice. 
 
 Note. — The present and imperfect tenses in the active voice are 
 called simple tenses, because they are seldom compounded with 
 any of tlie auxiliary verbs, unless for the sake of emphasis : as, " I 
 do love, he did write,^' 8tc. 
 
 The auxiliary verbs may be used as signs to point out the moods 
 and tenses of the principal verbs. The sign of the present tense indi- 
 cative, when used emphatically, is do, and of the imperfect did : as, 
 " I do love ; I did write." The sign of the perfect is have : as, I havt 
 written. The sign of the pluperfect is had: as, I had written." The 
 sign of the first future is shall or will, and of tlie second future shall or 
 will have ; as, " I shall or will write, I shall or will have written." 
 The sing of the potential mood, present tense, is Tnay or can ; as, *' I 
 may or can write." The sign of the imperfect is might, could, shonld, 
 or would ; as, I might, could, should, or would write." The sign of 
 the perftH't is tnay or can have ; as, " I may or can have written." 
 The sign of the pluperfect is might, could, should, or would have ; 
 as, " 1 might, could, should, or would have written." 
 
 The sign of the infinitive mood is to : as, to read, to write ; and the 
 sign of the subjunctive mood is, if, thmigh, unless, or some other 
 conjunction implying doubt or contingency. By learning the above 
 signs the pupil may be easily taught to conjugate any verb in the 
 English language. 
 
 The auxiliary and active verb To have is conjugated 
 in the following manner : 
 
 TO HJIVE. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 . Pers. 1 have. 1 . \Vc have. 
 
 2. Pers. 'I hou hast. 2. Yc or you have. 
 
 3. Pen Ho, she, or it, I „ , . 
 
 hatliorhas. S 1 hey nave. 
 
 1 . W hat is the conjugulion of a verb > What is the conjugation ol 
 the active and passive voice styled ? In the Note what tenses arr 
 called simple 7 What are the signs of the moods and tenses 1 
 
 # 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 29 
 
 ed ivithin a period of 
 m to pass away : ts, 
 irely ; the philosopher! 
 eries ; I have written 
 I returned to-day." 
 
 of the Verb, 
 s regular combin- 
 lUmbers, persons, 
 
 styled the Active 
 3 Passive Voice. 
 
 the active Toice are 
 a compounded with 
 of emphasis : as, " I 
 
 point out the moods 
 he present tense indi- 
 te imperfect did : as, 
 ;ct is have : as, I havt 
 1 had written." The 
 second future shall or 
 ■ will have written." 
 
 I may or can 
 
 (( 
 
 I 
 
 might, could, thonld, 
 write." The sign of 
 >r can have written." 
 mid, or would Aavs ,' 
 :ten." 
 
 ad, to write ; and the 
 mless, or some other 
 y learning the above 
 gate any verb in the 
 
 ve is conjugated 
 
 1. 
 
 have. 
 
 tr you have. 
 
 have. 
 
 I the conjugation oi 
 )te what tenses arr 
 Bind tenses 1 
 
 Singular. 
 1. I have had. 
 i. Thou hast had. 
 3. He, &.C., has had. 
 
 1. 
 3. 
 
 Singular. 
 I had had. 
 Thou hadst had. 
 He, &c., had had. 
 
 1. 
 
 Imperfect Tense, 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 i. 1 had. 1. Wc had. 
 
 . Thou hadst. 2. Ye or you had. 
 
 . He, &c., had. 3. They had. 
 
 Perfect Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We have had. 
 
 2. Ye or you have had. 
 
 3. They have had. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We had had. 
 
 2. Ye or you had had. 
 
 3. They hud had. 
 
 First Future Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 I shall or will have. 1 . Wc shall or will have. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or r/ilt have. 2. Ye or you shall or will have. 
 
 3. He, &c., shall or will have. 3. They shall or will iiave. 
 
 Second Future Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall, &c., have had. 1. Wc shall or will have had. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or will have had. 2. Ye or you shall or will have 
 He, 6ic. shall or will have had. 
 had. 3. They shall or will have hail. 
 
 Imperative IMood. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Let me have. 1 . Let us have. 
 
 Have, or have tliou, or do 2. Have, or have yc or you, or do 
 thou liavc. ye or you have. 
 
 3. Let him, her, or it, have. 3. Let thcui ha\e. 
 
 Or, without the auxiliaries. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 2. HavCj &c., Ihdu. 2. Have, or liavc yc or you. 
 
 Noli'. — The iuiponilivc mood is not properly enlitliul to ilinr per- 
 aons. Tlie cdinniiiini, eutnaly, (ir pcriniission (expressed by the im- 
 perative mooil, is always made to the second person, but never to the 
 jirsl or third. The word /^r^ is one of those verbs uliieh have the 
 infinitive n\ood after Ihcm without tlic siii;n io. and seems to be cijiiiv- 
 alent to the word permit or allow ; as, '' Let mc have," that if, 
 " I^ct mc to have," or, *' permit or allow mc lo buvt; ;" /(/ bciiiir in 
 the second person iuiporativ(! niootl, atul /tavc in the intliiitivc uiood, 
 tlic sign to i)eiiig understood. The phrases, *' Let .lohn go ; let them 
 tpeak; li!t James rend," he, must be analysed in tiic same munner 
 "ihttt tlicy may be properly parsed. 
 
 B 
 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
urn 
 
 [ i 
 
 ' I 
 
 .!!,• 
 
 30 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 . I may or can have. 
 
 2. Thou mayst or canst have. 
 
 3. He, &c., may or can have. 
 
 Plural. 
 1 . We may or can have, 
 il. Ye or you may or can haye. 
 3. They may or can have. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I might, could, should, or 1. We might, could, should, or 
 would have. "would have. 
 
 2. Thou mightst, couldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, should, 
 
 shouldst, or wouldst have. or ivould have. 
 
 3. He, he, might, could, should, 3. They n.ight, could, should, or 
 
 or would have. would have. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 . I may or can have had. 1 • We may or can have had 
 
 2. Thou mayst or canst have 2. Ye or you may or can have 
 had. l>atl. 
 
 3. He, &c., may or can have had. 3. They may or can have had. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I might, could, should, or 1. We might, could, ehould, or 
 would have had. would luive had. 
 
 2. Thou ml:,'htst, couldst,shouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, shouUlj 
 
 or wouldst have had. or would have had. 
 
 3. He, &c., might, could, should, 3. They nught, could, should, or 
 or would have had. would liavc had. 
 
 Subjunctive MooJ. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 . If I have. 
 
 2. If thou have. 
 
 3. If he, &.C., liavc. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. If I had. 
 
 2. If thou hadst. 
 
 3. If he, &c., had. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. If I have had. 
 
 2. If thou hast had. 
 
 3. If he, hi'., has had. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. If we have. 
 
 2. If ye or you have. 
 
 3. If tlicy iiave. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. If we had. 
 
 2. If yc or you had. 
 
 3. If they had. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. If we have had. 
 
 2. If ye or you hav iiad' 
 
 3. If they have had. 
 
 1.1 
 «. I 
 8. If 
 
 *^iKu., 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 31 
 
 Pluperfect Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 r can have, 
 may or can haye. 
 or can have. 
 
 , could, should, or 
 
 <c. 
 
 might, could, should, 
 
 Imve. 
 
 ht, could, should, or 
 
 ve. 
 
 il. 
 
 or can have had 
 
 I may or can have 
 
 or can have had. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 t, could, should, or 
 
 c had. 
 
 might, could, shoulil; 
 
 uivc had. 
 
 it, could, should, or 
 vc had. 
 
 III have. 
 
 Vf. 
 
 al. 
 
 )U had. 
 J. 
 
 111. 
 
 li had. 
 )u liavr- had 
 vc had. 
 
 ■^ 
 
 Singular. 
 
 .|. If I had had 
 
 «. If tliou hadst had. 
 >i. If he, &c. had had. 
 
 First Future Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . If we had had. 
 
 2. If ye or you had had. 
 
 3. If they had had. 
 
 Singular. 
 1. If I shall or will iiavc. 
 j2. If thou shalt or wilt have. 
 •3. If ho, &c., shall or will have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . If we shall or will have. 
 
 2. If ye or you shall or will have. 
 
 3. If they shall or will have. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 Singulur. 
 
 1. If I shall or will have had. 1. 
 
 2. If thou shalt or wilt have had. 2. 
 
 3. If he, &c., shall or will have 3. 
 had. 
 
 Plural. 
 If wc shall or will have had. 
 If ye or you shall or will have 
 had. 
 If they shall or will have had. 
 
 Note. — The indicative mood is converted into the subjunctive wiiCM- 
 ercr a condition, motion, wish, or supposition is implied ; so tht 
 potential mood may in tlic same manner be turned into the sub- 
 junctive ; as, "' If I could dutrivc him, I would not j" " Though lie 
 ahould iuci'eusc his wealth ;" Stc. It is not necessary that the coh- 
 junction, wiiich accompanies the subjunctive mood, should be ahva)!.* 
 expressed ; it is frequently undcrstcjud, as, Were I to go, he would 
 not follow j" " Had he known me, lie would have treated me difl'cr- 
 ently ;" that is, "Ifl were to go ; If he had known ;" &c. 
 
 It should be observed that the present subjunctive often points oul 
 the relative time of a future action ; <•' If they arrive to-morrow, I will 
 ■ec tlieni ;" '' If I send the note this evening, he will receive it." 
 The auxiliaries should and would are used to express the present and 
 Alture, as well as the jinst ; so tliat the precise time of the verb in 
 the subjunctive mood must often bo doterniiiicd by the nature niul 
 drift of the sentoiiee ; as, "It is my desire tiiat he should or would 
 come n()w or to-morrow j" "It was my desire that he should <'i 
 W<juld come last week." 
 
 ^|b Infinitive MooJ. 
 
 Present. To have. Perfect. To have had. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 '■A 
 
 Present or Adivc. 
 Perfect or Passive. 
 Compound Perfect. 
 
 Having. 
 Had. ' 
 Havinn; had. 
 
 The auxiliary and neuter verb, To be, is conjugated ae 
 .rollovvs j 
 
32 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I am. 
 
 2. Thou art. 
 
 3. He, she, 07' it, is. 
 
 Singular^ 
 
 1. I was. 
 
 2. Thou wast. 
 
 3. He,[,8cc., was. 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMARt 
 TO BE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . We are. 
 
 2. Ye or you are. 
 
 3. They are. 
 
 Imperfect Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . We were. 
 
 2. Ye or you were. 
 
 3. They were. 
 
 Perfect Tertse, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 . I have been. 
 
 2. Thou hast been. 
 
 3. He, &c., has or hath been. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . We have been. 
 
 2. Ye or you have been. 
 
 3. They have been. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 . I had been. 
 
 2. Thou hadst been. 
 
 3. He, See., had been. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We had been. 
 
 2. Ye or you had been . 
 
 3. They had been. 
 
 First Future Tense, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 . I shall or will be. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt be. 
 
 3. He, &c. shall or will be. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . Wc shall oj' will be. 
 
 2. Ye or you shall or will be. 
 
 3. They shall or will be. 
 
 -^ 
 
 Second Future Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall or will have been. 1. We shall or will haTc been. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt have been. 2. Ye or you shall or will hav 
 
 been. 
 
 3. He, Sec., shall or will have 3. They shall or will have been, 
 been. 
 
 ^Imperative Mood. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Let inc be. 1. Let us be. 
 
 2. Be, or be thou, or do thou be. 2. Be, or be yc'or you, or do yc i* 
 
 you bo. 
 
 3. Let lum, her, or it, be. 3. Let tlicm be. 
 
WV^XOliOli y • 
 
 33 
 
 are. 
 
 u were, 
 re. 
 
 I been. 
 
 )u have been. 
 
 ive been. 
 
 been. 
 
 )u had been. 
 
 d been. 
 
 II or will be. 
 
 ou shall or \vill be. 
 
 all or will be. 
 
 m 
 
 II or will have been. 
 you shall or will hav 
 
 lall or will have been. 
 
 1. 
 
 he. 
 
 be yc'or you, w io yc c 
 
 :m be. 
 
 2. 
 I. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 I may or can be. 4 ^ • ^® ""^y <"' ^^" ^®' 
 
 Thou mayst or canst be. " 2. Ye or you may or can be. 
 He, &c., may or can be. ^ 3. They may or can be. 
 
 Imperfect Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 i. I might, could, should, or 1. We might, could, should, or 
 
 would be. would be. 
 
 Thou mightst, couldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, should, 
 
 shouldst, or wouldst be. or would be. 
 
 He, &c., might, could, should, 3. They might, could, should, or 
 ,. _ 01- would be. would be. 
 
 I Perfect Tense, 
 
 ■p Singular. Plural. 
 
 ). I may or can have been. 1. We may cr can have been. 
 
 2. Thou mayst or canst have 2. Yc or you may or can have 
 
 been. been. 
 
 8. He, &c., may or can have been. 3. They may or can have been. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I might, could, should, or 1. VVc might, could, should, or 
 
 would have been. would have been. 
 
 2. Thou mightst, couldst, shouldst, 2. Yc or you might, could, should, 
 or wouldst have been. or would have been. 
 
 3. He, &c., might, could, should, 3. They might, could, should, or 
 ^ or would have been. would have been. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood, 
 
 '» Present Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. If we be. 
 
 2. If ye or you be. 
 
 3. If they be. 
 
 ' Imperfect Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . If wc were. 
 
 2. If ye or you were. 
 
 3. If they were. 
 
 Perfect Tense,' 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. If we have been. 
 
 2. If ye or you have been. 
 
 Singular. 
 1. If I be. 
 2* If tliou be. 
 9. Ifhc, &c., be. 
 
 ■ Singular. 
 
 1. If I were. 
 
 2. Ifthou wcrt. 
 
 3. If he. Sec, were. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. If I have been. 
 
 2. If thou hast been. 
 
 I. If he, &c., haa or hath been. 3. If they have been. 
 
J I 
 
 ^' i 
 
 M 
 
 34 
 
 BMOI.IOU CPA^MMAR. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 1. If I had been. 1. If we had been, 
 
 'i. If thou hadst been. 2. If ye o/- you had been. 
 
 3. If he, &c., had been. 3. If they had been. 
 
 First Future Tense, 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. If I shall or will be. 1. If we shall or will be. 
 
 2. If thou shalt or wilt be. 2. If ye or you shall or will be. 
 
 3. If he, &c., shall or %vill be. 3. If they shall or will be. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 J. If I shall or will have been. 1. If we shall or will have been. 
 
 2. IfUiou shalt or wilt have been. 2. Ifye or you shall or will have 
 
 been. 
 
 3. If he, &c., shall or will have 3. If tliey shall or will have been, 
 been. 
 
 Infinitive Mood, 
 
 Present Tense, To be. Perfect, To have been. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. Being. Perfect. Been. 
 
 Compound Perfect. Having been 
 
 ' SECTION VI. — The Conjunction of Regular Verbs. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 I. Verbs Active are called Regular when they form 
 their imperfect tense of the indicative mood, and their 
 perfect participle, by adding to the verb ed, or d only 
 when the verb ends in e ; as, 
 
 Present. Imperfect. Perfect Participle. 
 
 I favour. 1 favoured. Favoured. 
 
 I love. I loved. Loved. 
 
 Question. — 1. When is a verb called regular] Conjugate tlw 
 verb to love. 
 
 A Regular Active Verb is conjugated in the following 
 
 manner : 
 
 TO LOVE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I love. 1. We love. 
 
 2. Thou lovcst. 2. Ye or you love. 
 
 3. He, she, or it, loves or ( 3. They love. 
 ^ loveth. ^ 
 
 |t>' 
 
 »*^v~<. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 88 
 
 been. 
 
 u had been. 
 
 , been. 
 
 1 or will be. 
 
 )u shall or will be. 
 
 ill or will be. 
 
 [ or will have been. 
 M shall or will have 
 
 ill or will have been. 
 
 To have been. 
 
 Perfect. Been, 
 laving been 
 
 Regular Verbs. 
 
 \r when they form 
 ; mood, and their 
 rerb erf, or d only 
 
 Perfect Participle, 
 Favoured. 
 Loved, 
 ularl Conjugate tte 
 
 Led in the following 
 
 I. 
 
 >a love, 
 vc. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I loved. 
 Thou lovedst. 
 He, &c., loved. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I have loved. 
 Thou hast loved. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We loved. 
 
 2. Ye or you loved. 
 
 3. They loved. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 if. I have loved. 1. We have loved. ' 
 
 i. Thou hast loved. 2. Ye or you have loved. 
 
 9. He, &,€., has or hath loved. 3. They have loved. 
 
 Plvperject Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 It I had loved. 1. We had loved. 
 
 2. Thou hadst loved. 2. Ye or you had loved. 
 
 3* He, &c., had loved. 3. They had loved. 
 
 First Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall or will love. 1. We shall or will love. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt love. 2. Ye or you shall or will love. 
 S. He, &c., shall or will love. 3. They shall w will love. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall or will have loved. 1. We shall or will have loved. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt have loved. 2. Ye or you shall or will have 
 
 loved. 
 
 3. He, &c., shall or will have 3. They shall or will have loved. 
 loved. 
 
 Note. — The following forms are used in present and imperfect 
 tenses when emphasis or positiveness is expressed, and when a quea- 
 tSon is asked. 
 
 Present Tense Emphatic. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I do love. I. We do love. 
 
 2. Thou dost love. 2. Ye or you do love. 
 
 3. He, &,c., docs or doth love. 3. They do love. 
 
 Imperfect Tense Emphatic. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I did love. 1. We did love. 
 
 2. Thou didst- love. 2. Ye or you did love. ] 
 
 3. He, ikc.,^did love. 3. They did love. 
 
 M" Present Tense Emphatic and Interrogative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Do 1 love 1 1. Do we love ? 
 
 2. Dost thou love ? 2. Do ye or you love^t 
 
 3. Does or doth he, &c., love 1 3. Do they love 1 
 
 <.. 
 
36 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 '! i 
 
 i( i 
 
 .' ^f 
 
 liif 
 
 !< 
 
 ! I . 1 
 
 ft I 
 
 Imperfect Tense Emphatic and Inferrogative* 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 . Did I love 7 1 . Did we love 1 
 
 2. Didst thou love ? 2. Did ye or you love 1 
 
 3. Did he, &c., love. 3. Did they love 1 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Let me love. 1. Let us love. 
 
 2. Love, or love thou, or do thou 2. Love, or love ye or you, or do 
 
 love. ye or you love. 
 
 3. Let him, her, or it, love. 3. Let them love. 
 
 Or, without the Auxiliaries. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 2. Love, Or love thou. 2, Love, or love ye or you. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 Present Tense, 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I may or can love. 1. Wc may or can love. 
 
 2. Thou mayst or canst love. 2. Ye or you may or can love. 
 
 3. He, &c., may or can love. 3. They may or can love. 
 
 Imperfect Tense, 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I might, could, should, or would 1. Wc'j might, could, should, f 
 
 love. would love- 
 
 2. Thou mightst, couldst, shouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, shouk 
 
 or wouldst love. or would love. 
 
 3. He, &,c., might, could, should, 3. They might, could, should, c 
 or would love. %vould love. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I may or can have loved. 1 . We may or can have loved. 
 
 2. Thou mayst or canst have 2. Ye or you may or can ba^ 
 loved. loved. 
 
 3. He, &c., may or can have 3. Tijey may or can have loved, 
 loved. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. 1 might, could, should, or 1. Wc might, could, should, c 
 would have loved.1 would have loved. 
 
 2. Thou miglitst, couldst,shouldat, 2. Ye or you might, could, shouli 
 
 or wouldst have loved. or would have loved. 
 
 3. He, kc, might, could, should, 3. They might, could, should, c 
 
 or would have loved. would have loved. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 J. If I love. 1. If we love. 
 
 2. If thou love. 2. If ye or you love. 
 
 i. If he, &c., love. 3. If they love 
 
 'm 
 
 Not 
 its pre 
 all its 
 
 is teac 
 teniin 
 
 1. 
 
 their 
 the ^ 
 the p 
 lovedj 
 
 I'JIW* ... 
 
R* 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 37 
 
 Inierrogaiive* 
 
 lural. 
 
 love % 
 
 or you love \ [ 
 
 jy love % 
 
 I. 
 
 Mural. 
 
 love. 
 
 or love ye or you, or d; 
 
 rou love. 
 
 jm love. 
 
 anes. 
 
 ?lural. 
 
 , or love ye or you. 
 
 1. 
 
 ay or can love, 
 you may or can love, 
 nay or can love. 
 ?. 
 
 ural. 
 
 night, could, should, c 
 love. 
 
 you might, could, shouli 
 lid love. 
 
 might, could, should, c 
 I love. 
 
 ural. 
 
 lay or can have loved. 
 
 r you may or can hav 
 
 • 
 
 may or can have loved. 
 
 ural. 
 
 might, could, should, c 
 
 X have loved. 
 
 you might, could, shoul 
 ould have loved. 
 
 might, could, should, ^ 
 
 have loved. 
 
 0(1. 
 
 Plural 
 love. 
 
 or you love. 
 y love 
 
 Singular. 
 ir I loved. 
 If thou lovedst. 
 If he, &c., loved. 
 
 Imperfect Tense* 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . If we loved. 
 
 2. If ye or you loved. , 
 
 3. If they loved. 
 
 Perfect Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. If I have loved. 1. If we have loved. 
 
 % If thou hast loved. ^ 2. !f ye or you have loved. 
 
 8. If he, &c., has or hath luved. 3. If they have loved. 
 
 lH Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. If I had loved. 1. If we had loved. 
 
 2. If thou hadst loved. 2. If ye or you had loved. 
 
 3. If he, &c., had loved. 3. If they had loved. 
 
 First Future Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. ? 
 
 1. If I shall or will love. 1. If we shall or will love. 
 
 2. If thou shall or wilt love. 2. If ye or you siiall or will love. 
 
 3. If he, &c., shall or will love. 3. If they shall or will love. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. If I shall or will have loved. 1. If we shall or will have (loved. 
 
 2. Ifthoushalt or wilt have loved.2. If yc or you shall or will have 
 
 loved. 
 
 3. If he, &c., shall or will have 3. If tliey shall or will have loved, 
 loved. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Pnsent. To love. Perfect. To have loved. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. Loving. Perfect. Loved, 
 
 Compound Perfect. Having loved. 
 
 Note. — The active verb may be conjugated differently by adding 
 its present or active participle to the auxiliary verb to be through 
 all fts moods and tenses j as, instead of " I teach, tliou teachest, he 
 ttiVhes, &c., wc may say, " I am teacliing ; thou art teaching ; he 
 is teaching ; he was teacliing ; I have been teaching," &c. The 
 toMinations, st and etfi, are only used on grave subjects. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 1. Verbs passive are called regular wlien they form 
 their perfect participle by the addition of d or eel to 
 
 the 
 the 
 
 verb : as, from 
 
 passive, 
 loved, &c." 
 
 «I 
 
 am 
 
 the verb, "to 
 loved, 1 was 
 
 B2 
 
 love," is formed 
 loved| I shall be 
 
38 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 t i 
 
 : iili 
 
 '.lite.:: 
 
 U 
 
 ' 
 
 'IB 
 
 11 ■ 
 
 ■■<! 
 
 ■Hi 
 
 r 
 
 |i 'I 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 . I am loved. 
 
 2. Thou art loved. 
 
 3. He, &c., is loved. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I was loved. 
 
 2. Thou wast loved. 
 
 3. He, &,c., was lovedi 
 
 A passive verb is conjugated by adding the perfect 
 
 participle to tlie auxiliary, to ie, through all its changes 
 
 of number, person, mood, and tense, in the following 
 
 manner: 
 
 Question. — 1. When are passive verbs called regular? How is 
 the passive verb conjugated 1 Conjugate the verb to be loved. 
 
 TO BE LOVED, 
 
 Indicative Mood, 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We are loved. 
 
 2. Ye or you arc loved. 
 
 3. They are loved. 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Wc were loved, 
 
 2. Ye or you were loved. 
 
 3. Tlioy were loved. 
 Perfect Tense, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I have been loved. 1. Wc have been loved. 
 
 2. Thou hast been loved. 2. Ye or you have been loTCd. 
 
 3. He, &c., has or hath been 3. Tlicy jiave been loved. 
 
 loved. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. 1 had been loved. 1. W^c had been loved. 
 
 2. Thou hadst been loved. 2. Yc o?- you had bren loved. 
 .?. He, &c., had been hned. 3. They had been loved. 
 
 First Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall or will be loved. 1. Wo sliall or will be lorcd. 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt be loved. 2. Ye or you shall or will If 
 
 loved. 
 
 3. He, Sic, shall or will bo loved. 3. Th(\v shall or will be loved. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall or will have been loved. 1. Wc shall or will Imv) beer 
 
 loved. 
 
 2. Thou'shalt or wilt have been 2. Yc or you shall or will hati 
 loved. been loved. 
 
 3. He, he, will liave been loved. 3. They lic, will have been I OTcd 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Lctnic he loved. 1. Let us be loved. 
 
 2. Be l'iv( d, or he lliou loved, or 2, Be lovrd,or be ye or you loved 
 do fliou be loved. or do yc or you be lovcd» 
 
 3. Let liiui, her, or it be loved. 3. Let tlicm be loved» 
 
 • i u 
 
ETTMOLOGT* 
 
 39 
 
 dding the perfect 
 gh all its changed 
 , in the following 
 
 sd regular? How is 
 crb to be loved* 
 
 lural. 
 ncd. 
 
 u arc loved, 
 loved. 
 
 hural. 
 ! loved, 
 u were loved. 
 re loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 : been loved. 
 
 u have been loved. 
 
 ve been loved. 
 
 e. 
 
 ural. 
 
 been loved, 
 ou liad been loved, 
 d been loved. 
 
 • 
 
 Plural. 
 
 II or will be lorcd. 
 yoxi shall or will br 
 
 lall or will be loved. 
 se. 
 
 Plural, 
 ill or will hav^ beer 
 
 Fou shall or will har 
 
 lod. 
 
 .0., ^vill have been lovod 
 
 Plural. 
 Jc luvcd. 
 
 i\,or be ye or you lore^i 
 (; cr you ho loved, 
 ra be loved. 
 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 
 2- 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 S. 
 
 1. 
 
 t 
 8. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 I may or can be loved. 1 . We may or can be loved. 
 
 Thou mayst or canst be loved. 2. Ye or you may or can be 
 
 loved. 
 He, &c., may or can be loved. 3. They may or. can be loved. 
 
 Imperfect Tense* 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Imight, could, should, or would 1. We might, could, should or 
 
 be lovod. would be loved. 
 
 Thou niightst, couldst, shouldst, 2. Ye or you might,could, should, 
 
 or M'ouldst be loved. or would be loved . 
 
 He, &tc., might, could, should, 3. They might, could, should, or 
 
 or would be loved. would be loved. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 SingiUar. Plural. 
 
 I may or can have been loved. 1. We may or can have been 
 
 loved. 
 Thou mayst or canst have been 2. Ye or you may or can have 
 loved. been loved. 
 
 He, 8tc.,may or can have been 3. They may or can have been 
 loved. loved. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Imiglil.cnnld, should, or would 1. We miglit, could, should, or 
 have lucii loved. would have been loved. 
 
 Tliou mi^litst, couldst, shouldst, 2. Yc or you might, could, should, 
 or wouldst have been loved. or would have been loved. 
 
 He, &e., might, could, should, 3. They might, could, should, or 
 or would ijdvc been loved. would have been loved. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 . If wc be loved. 
 
 2. If ye or you l>e loved, , 
 
 3. If they be loved. 
 
 Imperfect Tense, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. If wc were loved. 
 
 2. If yc or you w( n- loved. 
 If he. kc, i\<rc loved. 3. If they were loved. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 Singula. Plural. 
 
 If I liave iPi'( n loved. 1. If wc have been loved. 
 
 If Uiou \vi)*\ be.'u loved. 2. If ye or you have been loved. 
 
 If he, fitc. lias or hall) been 
 lovcU. 3. If tliey have been loved. 
 
 Singular. 
 If I l)eloved. 
 If thou be loved. 
 If he, &,c., beloved. 
 
 Singular. 
 If I were lovftd. 
 If thou M'Tt loved. 
 
TiH'^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 40 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 . If I had been loved. 1 . If we had been loved. 
 
 2. If thou hadst been loved. 2. If ye or you had been loved. 
 
 3. If be, &c.j had been loved. 3. If they had been loved. 
 
 First Future^ Tense, 
 Singular* Plural. 
 
 1 . If I shall or will be loved. 1. If we shall or will be loved. 
 :i. If thou shalt or wilt be loved. 2. If ye or you shall or will Iw 
 
 loved. 
 3. If he, &C.2 shall or will be 3. If they shall or will be loved, 
 loved. 
 
 Second Future Tensed 
 Singular. " Plural. 
 
 1. If I shall or will have been 1. If we shall or will have been 
 
 lovtd. loved. 
 
 J. If thou shalt or wilt have been 2. If ye or you shall or will 
 
 loved. have been loved. 
 
 3. If he, &c., shall or will have 3. If they shall or will have beei. 
 been loved. loved. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Present Tense. Perfect. 
 
 To be loved. To have been loved. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. Being loved. Perfect or Passive. Been loved. 
 Compound Perfect, Having been loved. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERDS. 
 
 Irregular verbs are those which do not form their im- 
 perfect tense and perfect participle by the addition of c 
 or ed to the verb ; as, 
 
 Present, Imperfect. Perfect Participle. 
 
 I begin I began begun 
 
 1 kut'w I knew known 
 
 Irregular verbs are of various sorts* 
 
 1. Such as have the present and imperfect tenses, ami 
 clie perfect participle, the same j as, 
 Present. 
 Burst 
 Cai<t. 
 Cost 
 Cut 
 Hit 
 Hurt 
 Knit 
 Let 
 
 QHce/i'an.— What arc irregular vcrbi? 
 
 Imperfect, 
 burst 
 
 Perfect ParticipU. 
 burst 
 
 cast 
 
 cast 
 
 cost 
 
 cost 
 
 cut 
 Ml 
 
 hurt 
 
 cut 
 hit 
 hurt 
 
 knit or knitted 
 let 
 
 knit or knitted 
 
 let 
 
L. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 41 
 
 
 Phsent, 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Lift 
 
 lifted or lift 
 
 lifted or lift 
 
 d been loved. 
 
 
 put 
 
 put 
 
 you had been loTed. 
 
 Mkit 
 
 quit or quitted 
 
 quit or quitted 
 
 ad been loved. 
 
 Md 
 
 rid 
 
 rid 
 
 
 AM 
 
 set 
 
 set 
 
 ?• 
 
 fliked 
 
 shed 
 
 shed 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Slircd 
 
 shred 
 
 shred 
 
 all or will be loved. 
 
 Shut 
 
 shut 
 
 shut 
 
 you shall or will be 
 
 SUt 
 
 slit or slitted 
 
 slit or slitted 
 
 
 Split 
 
 split or splitted 
 
 split or splitted 
 
 hall or will be loved. 
 
 Spread 
 Tnrust 
 
 spread 
 
 spred 
 
 Plural. 
 
 thrust 
 
 thrust 
 
 2. Such as liave the imperlect tense and perfect pj 
 
 lall or will have been 
 
 ticiple the some; 
 
 ns, 
 
 
 f" you shall or will 
 
 Pnsent. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 en loved. 
 
 Abide 
 
 abode 
 
 abode 
 
 hall or will have beei 
 
 Bake 
 
 baked 
 
 baked or baken 
 
 
 Bend 
 
 bent or bended 
 
 bent or bended 
 
 
 Borcave 
 
 bereft or bereaved 
 
 bereft or bereaved 
 
 Perfect. 
 lavc been loved. 
 
 Bcfcecli 
 
 besought 
 
 besought 
 
 Bind! 
 
 bound 
 
 bound 
 
 
 Bleed 
 
 bled 
 
 bled 
 
 
 Bleu* 
 
 blessed or blest 
 
 blessed or blest 
 
 jssivc. Been loved. 
 
 Breed 
 
 bred 
 
 bred 
 
 i been loved. 
 
 Bring 
 
 brought 
 
 brought 
 
 3 
 
 Build 
 
 built or buildcd 
 
 built or builded 
 
 
 Bum 
 
 burnt or burned 
 
 burnt or burned 
 
 not form their im- 
 
 Buy 
 
 bought 
 
 bought 
 
 r the addition of c 
 
 Catcii 
 
 Cleave, lo adhere 
 
 caught or catched 
 clave or cleaved 
 
 caught or catched 
 cleaved 
 
 
 Cleavoj to split 
 
 clove, clave, o^- cleft 
 
 cloven or cleft 
 
 rfed Participle, 
 
 CUng 
 
 clung 
 
 clung 
 
 )cgun 
 
 Climb 
 
 climbed or clomb 
 
 climbed 
 
 mown 
 
 Crvjep 
 
 crept 
 
 crept 
 
 IS sorts. 
 
 Deal 
 
 dealt or dcaled 
 
 dealt or dealcd 
 
 *w 0\*i 99 V 
 
 Dig 
 
 dug or digged 
 
 dug or digged 
 
 perfect tenses, anu 
 
 Dwell 
 
 dwelt or dwelled 
 
 dwelt or dwelled 
 
 
 Feel 
 
 felt 
 
 felt 
 
 Perfect ParticipU. 
 
 Fight 
 Fittd 
 
 fought 
 found 
 
 fought 
 found 
 
 'UIom 
 
 Flee 
 
 fled 
 
 fled 
 
 151 
 
 ost 
 
 Fling 
 
 flung 
 
 flung 
 
 ut 
 
 Get 
 
 got or gat 
 
 gotten or got 
 
 il 
 
 Gild 
 
 gilt or gilded' 
 
 gilt or gilded 
 
 lift 
 
 Gird 
 
 girt or girded 
 
 girt or girded 
 
 nit or knitted 
 
 Grind 
 Hang 
 
 ground 
 
 hung or hanged 
 
 ground 
 
 hung or hanged 
 
 t% 
 
 Have 
 
 had" 
 
 hnd 
 
 
 U«iir 
 
 Iteurd 
 
 heard 
 
 /, 
 
n 
 
 I:i 
 
 if* 
 
 I 
 
 t '■ 
 
 ■! ,,i:! 
 
 ii 
 
 I 
 
 I i 
 
 I'. 
 
 i'k 
 
 w 
 
 42 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Present. 
 Heare 
 
 Imperfect. 
 heaved or hove 
 
 Perfect PariicipU. 
 heaved or hoven 
 
 Help 
 Hold 
 
 helped 
 held 
 
 helped or holpcn 
 held or holdeu 
 
 Keep 
 Kneel 
 
 kept 
 knelt 
 
 kept 
 knelt 
 
 Lay 
 
 Lead 
 
 laid 
 led 
 
 laid 
 led 
 
 Learo 
 
 learned or learnt 
 
 learned or learnt 
 
 Leave 
 
 lea 
 
 left 
 
 Lend 
 
 lent 
 
 lent 
 
 Light 
 Lose 
 
 lighted or lit 
 lost 
 
 lighted or lit 
 lost 
 
 Make 
 
 made 
 
 made 
 
 Mean 
 
 meant or meancd 
 
 meant or meancd 
 
 Meet 
 
 met 
 
 met 
 
 Melt 
 
 melted 
 
 melted or molten 
 
 Pay 
 
 Pen, to shut tip 
 
 Rap 
 
 Kead 
 
 paid 
 pent '' 
 
 rapped or rapt 
 read 
 
 paid 
 
 pent 
 
 rapped or rapt 
 
 read 
 
 Rend 
 
 rent 
 
 rent 
 
 Ride 
 
 rode or rid 
 
 ridden or rid 
 
 Rot 
 
 rotted 
 
 rotted or rotten 
 
 Say 
 
 said 
 
 said 
 
 Seek 
 Sell 
 
 sought 
 sold 
 
 souyht 
 sold 
 
 Send 
 
 sent 
 
 sent 
 
 Shape 
 Shave 
 
 shaped 
 sliaved 
 
 shaped or slmpcn 
 shaved or shaven 
 
 Shine 
 
 shone or sliired 
 
 shone or shincd , 
 
 Shoe 
 
 shod 
 
 shod 
 
 Shoot 
 
 shot 
 
 shot 
 
 Shrink 
 
 shrunk or shrank 
 
 shrunk 
 
 Shrive 
 
 shrived or slu"Ovo 
 
 shrived or shriven 
 
 Sit 
 
 sat 
 
 sat or sitten 
 
 Sleep 
 Slinu; 
 Slink 
 
 slept 
 
 slung 07' slang 
 
 slunk or slank 
 
 slept 
 
 slung 
 
 tlunk 
 
 Smell 
 
 smelled or smelt 
 
 smelled or smelt 
 
 Speed" 
 Spell 
 Spend 
 Spill 
 
 sped 
 
 spelled or spdt 
 
 spent 
 
 spilt or spilled 
 
 sped 
 
 spelled or spelt 
 
 spent 
 
 spill or spilled 
 
 Spin 
 Stand 
 
 !<pun or span 
 stood 
 
 spun 
 stood 
 
 StaTc 
 
 StOTC 
 
 slaved or stovo 
 
 »tick 
 
 stuck 
 
 stuck 
 
 Stini; 
 Stink 
 
 slung 
 
 stunk or stank 
 
 stung 
 stunk 
 
 Strew or strew ]■ 
 
 strewed or slrowcd 
 
 ^ strewn or strowH./ 
 ^ strewed or elrowtil* 
 
 Strike 
 
 vlruck 
 
 struck or itrickcQ 
 
Perfect Pariiciplt. 
 
 heaved or hovcn 
 
 helped or h()l|)cu 
 
 held or holdcu 
 
 kept 
 
 knelt 
 
 laid 
 
 led 
 
 learned or learnt 
 
 left 
 
 lent 
 
 lighted or lit 
 
 lust 
 
 made 
 
 meant or meancd 
 
 met 
 
 melted or molten 
 
 paid 
 
 pent 
 
 rapped or rapt 
 
 read 
 
 rent 
 
 ridden or rid 
 
 rotted or rotten 
 
 said 
 
 souL;ht 
 
 sold 
 
 sent 
 
 shaped or sl^pcn 
 
 shaved or shaven 
 
 shone or shincd , 
 
 shod 
 
 shot 
 
 shrunk 
 
 shrived or shriveii 
 
 sat or sittcn 
 
 slept 
 
 slung 
 
 &!unk 
 
 smellcd or smcU 
 
 sped 
 
 spelled or spelt 
 
 spent 
 
 ppilt or .spilled 
 
 spun 
 
 stood 
 
 .slaved or stovo 
 
 stuck 
 
 stung 
 
 stunk 
 
 strewn or slrowii. i 
 
 Bircncd or siroweih 
 
 struck or stricken 
 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 4 
 
 Pruentr 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Strii^g 
 
 strung 
 
 strung 
 
 ^eat 
 
 sweated or swet 
 
 sweated or swet 
 
 |»eop 
 
 swept 
 
 swept 
 
 awing 
 
 swung or swang 
 
 swung 
 
 fS."" 
 
 taught 
 told 
 
 taught 
 told 
 
 •WWnk 
 
 thought 
 
 thought 
 
 Toss 
 
 tossed or tost 
 
 tossed or tost 
 
 Weep 
 
 wept 
 
 wept 
 
 Wet 
 
 wetted or wet 
 
 wetted or wet ] 
 
 Win 
 
 ivon 
 
 won 
 
 Wind 
 
 wound or winded 
 
 wound » 
 
 Work 
 
 wrought or ^vorked 
 
 wrought or worked 
 
 Wrap 
 
 wrapped or wrapt 
 
 wrapped or wrapt 
 
 Wring 
 
 wrung or wringed 
 
 wrung or wringed 
 
 Writhe 
 
 writhed 
 
 writhcn or writhed 
 
 3. Stich -IS iiave the imperfect tense and perfect pa 
 
 ticiple uillerent ; 
 
 as, 
 
 
 Prtsent. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Am 
 
 was 
 
 been 
 
 Arise 
 
 arose 
 
 arisen 
 
 Awake 
 
 awoke or awaked 
 
 awaked 
 
 Bear, to bring forth 
 
 bare or bore 
 
 born 
 
 Bear, to carry 
 
 bore or bare 
 
 borne 
 
 Beat 
 
 beat 
 
 beat or beaten 
 
 iff'" 
 
 began 
 
 begun 
 
 bade or bid 
 
 bid or bidden 
 
 Biiie 
 
 bit 
 
 bitten or bit 
 
 Blow 
 
 blew 
 
 blown 
 
 Break 
 
 broke or brake 
 
 broken 
 
 Chide 
 
 chid or chode 
 
 chidden or chid 
 
 Choose 
 
 chose 
 
 chosen 
 
 Cleave, to split 
 
 clove, clave, or cleft 
 
 cleft or cloven 
 
 Clothe 
 
 clothed or clad 
 
 cloliied or clad 
 
 Come 
 
 came 
 
 come 
 
 Crow 
 
 crew 
 
 crowed 
 
 Dare, to venture 
 
 durst or dared 
 
 dared 
 
 Do 
 
 did 
 
 done 
 
 Draw 
 
 drew 
 
 drawn ■ 
 
 Drive 
 
 drove 
 
 driven 
 
 Drink 
 
 drank 
 
 drunk 
 
 Sat 
 
 cat or ate 
 
 eaten or cat 
 
 Fall 
 
 fell 
 
 fallen 
 
 reed 
 
 fed 
 
 fed 
 
 l^J 
 
 flew 
 
 flown 
 
 Forget 
 
 forgot or forgat 
 
 forgotten or forgot 
 
 Forsake 
 
 forsook 
 
 forsaken 
 
 Freeze 
 
 froze 
 
 frozen 
 
 Give 
 
 gave 
 
 given 
 
 Co 
 
 went 
 
 Kono 
 
 I 
 
'Wr**.). 
 
 ■' !:!■ 
 
 • I 
 
 i 
 
 Mi 
 '■I 
 
 H 
 
 44 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 Dbia 
 
 Grave 
 
 graved 
 
 graven or graved 
 
 XT* 
 
 Grow 
 
 grew 
 
 , grown 
 
 
 Hew 
 
 hewed 
 
 hewn or hewed 
 
 ^8y« 
 
 Hide 
 
 hid 
 
 hidden or hid 
 
 
 Know 
 
 knew 
 
 known 
 
 Lade 
 
 laded 
 
 laden 
 
 Lie, to lie down 
 
 lay 
 
 lain or lien 
 
 Load 
 
 loaded 
 
 laden or loaded' 
 
 Mow 
 
 mowed 
 
 mown or mowed 
 
 WIS 
 Wit 
 
 Ring 
 
 rang or rung 
 
 rung 
 
 TYll 
 
 Rise 
 
 rose 
 
 risen 
 
 
 Rivd ! 
 
 rived 
 
 riven 
 
 ■ 
 
 Run 
 
 ran 
 
 run 
 
 . • 
 
 Saw 
 
 sawed 
 
 sawn or sawed 
 
 bin 
 
 See 
 
 saw 
 
 seen 
 
 ne\ 
 
 Seethe 
 
 seethed or sod 
 
 sodden 
 
 • 
 Out 
 
 Shake 
 
 shook 
 
 shaken 
 
 Aim 
 
 Shear 
 
 sheared or shore 
 
 shorn 
 
 aro 
 
 Shew or show 
 
 shewed or showed 
 
 shewn or shown 
 
 son 
 
 Sing 
 
 sung 07' sang 
 
 sung 
 
 All 
 
 Sink 
 
 sunk or sank 
 
 sunk 
 
 Yo 
 
 Slay 
 
 slew 
 
 slain 
 
 • He 
 
 Slide 
 
 slid 
 
 slidden or slid 
 
 Smite 
 
 smote 
 
 smitten or smit 
 
 COl 
 
 Sow 
 
 sowed 
 
 sown or sowed 
 
 Yo 
 
 Speak 
 
 spoke or spake 
 
 spoken 
 
 pie 
 
 16 
 
 Spit 
 
 spit or spat 
 
 spit or spitten 
 
 Spring 
 
 sprung or sprang 
 
 sprung 
 
 TU 
 
 Steal 
 
 stole 
 
 stolen 
 
 Tn 
 
 Stride 
 
 strode or strid 
 
 stridden 
 
 W 
 
 Strive 
 
 strove 
 
 striven 
 
 
 Swear 
 
 su'ore or swarc 
 
 sworn 
 
 nlM 
 
 Swell 
 
 swelled 
 
 swollen or swelled 
 
 are 
 
 Swim 
 
 Bwum or swam 
 
 swum 
 
 Tn 
 
 Take 
 
 took 
 
 taken 
 
 Jol 
 
 Tear 
 
 tore or tare 
 
 torn 
 
 mi 
 
 Thrive 
 
 throve or thrived 
 
 thriven 
 
 IMIt 
 
 Throw 
 
 threw 
 
 thrown 
 
 
 Tread 
 
 trod or trode 
 
 trodden 
 
 Th 
 
 Wax 
 
 waxed 
 
 waxen , 
 
 ftn 
 
 Wear 
 
 wore 
 
 worn 
 
 If 
 
 Weave 
 
 wove 
 
 woven 
 
 VWk 
 
 Write 
 
 wrote or writ 
 
 written or writ 
 
 po 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Defective Verbs are those which are used only in some 
 of tlieir moods and tenses; as, am, waSf been; can, 
 could J may J might ; shallf should ; will, wouldj Sfc, 
 
 Note. — The whole number of Tcrbs in the English language it 
 about '1,300, including irregular and defcctiTC verbs, which amount 
 to about 200. 
 
 ■t -i-. 
 
IfB^'- 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 graven or graved 
 
 grown 
 
 hewn or hewed 
 
 hidden or hid 
 
 known 
 
 laden 
 
 lain or lien 
 
 laden or loaded' 
 
 mown or mowed 
 
 rung 
 
 risen 
 
 riven 
 
 run 
 
 sawn or sawed 
 
 seen 
 
 sodden 
 
 shaken 
 
 shorn 
 
 shewn or shown 
 
 sung 
 
 sunk 
 
 slain 
 
 slidden or slid 
 
 smitten or smit 
 
 sown or sowed 
 
 spoken 
 
 spit or spitten 
 
 sprung 
 
 stolen 
 
 stridden 
 
 striven 
 
 sworn 
 
 swollen or swelled 
 
 3wum 
 
 taken 
 
 orn 
 
 iriven 
 
 irown 
 
 rodden 
 
 traxcn J 
 
 irorn 
 
 oven 
 
 ritten or writ 
 
 used only in some 
 was^ been; can, 
 7, wouldi Sec 
 
 English language i< 
 I'crbs, wbich Amount 
 
 JPnsent. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 could 
 
 might 
 
 must 
 
 ought 
 
 quoth 
 
 should 
 
 would 
 
 wist 
 
 wot 
 
 EXERCISE — On 
 
 45 
 
 Perfect Participle, 
 (wanting.) 
 
 the Verbs, 
 
 1. I write. John loves to read. The boy killed the 
 bird. He committed a fault. We completed our jour- 
 ney. They have deceived me. He had resiffp©<l the 
 office. I will submit. They will have din-J before he 
 amves. He will have determined. Frepare your les- 
 son. Know yourselves. Lp* '""i consider. Pardon. 
 Allow me to speak. T can forgive. They may offend. 
 Yoli may go. Ho may overtake us. He would go. 
 He may hav^ resigned. They might have sold it. He 
 could have gone. I may be there. If they sell it. 
 You will receive it if they come. To see the sun is 
 pleasant, if I should write. Can we trust himl Is 
 he to be trusted 1 To have been admired avnils him not. 
 They ought to avoid bad company. Having a book. 
 Writing a letter. Moving slowly. 
 
 2. He is admired. The man was condemned. You 
 are loved. They are deceived. He has been honoured. 
 They have been forgiven. He had been convicted. 
 John was abused. Virtue will be rewarded. If I be ad- 
 mitteil. If they were loved. Charles may be admired. 
 He might be convinced. The boy may have been there. 
 The person will have been executed before the pardon 
 arrives. The book is now his, it was mine formerly. 
 If I may be allowed to speak. Be thou a friend to the 
 poor. Allow me to be your friend. The letter was 
 written. He is paid. He has been forsaken. Thou 
 
 Qucs/ton. — What arc defective verbs 1 
 
 Qutisl'wns on Exercise. — 1. Point out the verbs. Are they regu- 
 Itr, irregular, or defect' vc ; active, passive, or neuter 1 In what mood 
 and tense, number and person, arc they '{ Pqint out the participles. 
 f . Arc the above verba active, passive, or neuter 1 Tell their mood, 
 Unsc, number, and person. Point out tlic participleSj and tell what 
 kind they arc. 
 
■ l( ( 
 
 I' 
 
 ill j|. 
 
 h '(' 
 I I 
 
 i f 
 
 il 
 
 
 xi 
 
 m 
 
 •f 
 
 U. I 
 
 ! t 
 
 mi 
 
 ;' ;Mi' 
 
 '^ i =1 
 
 ip 
 
 1 1. 
 
 46 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 mayst be loved. Ridiculed, persecuted and despised, he 
 still maintained his principles. L^'jing reviled we bless. 
 Having been deserted he became discouraged. The 
 sight being now, he was startled. 
 
 3. Learn, call, begin, hate, come, do, go, perceive, 
 write, need, move, know, see, remember, permit, blow, 
 regard. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Of Adverbs. 
 
 1. An Adverb is a part of speech joined to a verb, an 
 adjective, and sometimes to another adverb, to express 
 sonic quality or circumstances respecting it: as, "He 
 reads well ,- " « A truli/ good man ;" " He writes vm 
 correctly." Some twl verbs are compared by er and est: 
 as, "Soon, sooner, soonest; often, oftener, oftenest; 
 those ending in ly are compared by more and most : as, 
 Wisely, more wisely, most wisely. 
 
 Note. — A short expression of two or more words frequently pc; 
 forms llie ofBce of an adverb, and is called an adverbial phrase 
 3uch as, " In fine, in general, at most, at least, by no means, nv 
 at all," &c. 
 
 Adverbs may be reduced to the following classes :— 
 
 1. Of number : as, " Once, twice, thrice," &c. 
 
 2. Of order: as, "Firstly, secondly, thirdly, lastlv, 
 finally," &c. 
 
 3. Of place : as, " Here, there, where, nowhere, any- 
 where, forward, backward, hence, thence," &c. 
 
 4. Of time* Of time present : as, " Now, today," &c 
 Of time past : as, " Already, before, lately, hitherto, lor. 
 since, long ago." Of time to come : as, " To-morrow, no 
 yet, hereafter, instantly, presently, by and by," &c. Oi 
 time indefinite : as, " Often, soon, seldom, daily, yearly, 
 always, when, then, ever, never, again," &c. 
 
 5. Of </wanf%; as, "Much, sufficiently, abundantly,"&c 
 
 Questions on Exercise.— 3. What verbs in paragraph the third an 
 regular 1 What irregular, and why 1 Conjugate them in the pres 
 ent tense 1 What is the imperfect tense of each ? The perfect ' 
 Pluperfect, &c. What is the imperative mood ? The potential ! 
 The subjunctive 1 The infinitive 1 The participles 1 Conjugate 
 them in the passive voice through all their mood;:< and tenses. 
 
 Questions on Adverbs. — 1. What is an adverb i How are Km 
 adverbs compared 1 
 
 i. 
 
R. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 47 
 
 ited and despised, he 
 ig reviled we bless. 
 
 The 
 
 discouraged. 
 
 le, do, go, perceive, 
 ember, permit, blow. 
 
 1 joined to a verb, an 
 r adverb, to expresj 
 meeting it : as, " He 
 ;" " He writes vct', 
 lared by er and est: 
 , oftener, oftenest; 
 more and most : as, 
 
 ire words frf^quently pci 
 ed an adverbial jihrau 
 \ least, by no means, ik 
 
 bllowing classes \— 
 !, thrice," &c. 
 )ndly, thirdly, lastly, 
 
 vhere, nowhere, anv' 
 
 hence," &c. 
 " Now, today," &r 
 lately, iiitherto, lor. 
 
 as, " To-morrow, no 
 
 )y and by," &c. Oi 
 
 eldom, daily, yearly, 
 
 lin," &c. 
 
 itly, abundantly,"&c 
 
 n paragraph the third an 
 njugate them in the pres 
 of each ? The perfect ' 
 mood ? The potential ' 
 participles % Conjugate 
 \wqC\» and tenses. 
 
 idverb i How are vom 
 
 '6. 0( manner or quality : as, « Wisely, justly, quickly, 
 ijlljitvly, badly, ably," &c. 
 
 '• ^^ doubt: as, " Perhaps, perchance, possibly," &c. 
 8. Of «jfi/;,.^4,-^„. as, « Verily, truly, yea, yes, indeed, 
 .ilirely," &c. 
 
 r,i,i9. Of negation: as, "Nay, no, .^t. not at all," &c. 
 ' 10. Of interrogation : as, " How, wliy, ^Uorefore, &c. 
 11. Of comparison : as, " More, most, better, \»ost, 
 almost, alike," See. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Of Prepositions. 
 
 ' 1, Prepositionsservetoconnectwords with one another, 
 and to show the relation between them. They are for 
 the most part set before nouns and pronouns : as, " He 
 went from London to York ;" " She is above disguise ;" 
 *f They are f='jpported by industry." 
 
 ■ 2. The following is a list of the principal prepositions : 
 
 nigh 
 
 of 
 
 off 
 
 on 
 
 over 
 
 round. 
 
 About 
 
 amid 
 
 before 
 
 between 
 
 except 
 
 Above 
 
 amidst 
 
 behind 
 
 betwixt 
 
 for 
 
 Aeross 
 
 among 
 
 below 
 
 beyond 
 
 from 
 
 After 
 
 amongst 
 
 beneath 
 
 but 
 
 
 in 
 
 Against 
 Along 
 
 around 
 
 beside 
 
 by 
 
 
 into 
 
 at 
 
 besides 
 
 down 
 
 
 near 
 
 
 Save 
 
 
 
 underneath 
 
 
 through 
 
 
 up 
 
 
 
 throughout 
 
 
 upon 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 with 
 
 
 
 towards 
 
 
 within 
 
 
 undet 
 
 
 
 without 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Of Conjunctions. 
 1. A Conjunction is a part of speech that is chiefly used 
 to connect sentences ; so as, out of two or more sentences, 
 to make but one. It sometimes connects only words. 
 'Conjunctions are principally divided into two sorts, the 
 (Mpulative and Disjunctive. 
 
 The Conjunction Copulative serves to connect or to 
 continue a sentence by expressing an addition, a sup- 
 
 Qucstions on Prepoxilions. — t. What is a preposition 1 2, Recite 
 the list of tlie principal propositions. 
 
 Questions on Conjunctions. — 1. What is a conjunction 1 How arc 
 Ihey divided '< What is the copulative conjunction 1 
 
:ii 
 
 '^3 
 
 ■ 'i! n 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 li: 
 
 ill!! 
 
 48 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 position, a cause, &c. : as, " He and his brother resii 
 in London;'* '* I will go if he will accompany me;' 
 " You are happy because you are good." 
 
 2. The Conjunction Disjunctive serv^^ --•• ^"^X ^^ ^^'^' 
 nect and continue the senlon'-^ "Ut also to express op. 
 position of meaning =- ^lUerent degrees: as, « Thmi^; 
 he was frni-'^'^^'y reproved, t/c^ he did not reform ; 
 i( They came with her, hut went away without her." 
 
 The following is a list of the principal conjunctions: 
 The Copulative. And, that, both, for, therefore, i: 
 
 then, since, because, wherefore. 
 
 The Disjunctive. But, than, though, either, or, as, ur 
 
 less, neither, nor, lest, yet, notwithstanding. 
 
 Note. — The same word is occasionally used as a conjunction an 
 an adverb, and sometimes as a preposition : as, " I rest then upo 
 this argument;" " He arrived Meji, and not before;" in the first ser 
 tence then is a conjunction, in the second it is an adverb. " I sui 
 mitted, /or it was vain to contend ;" "He contended /or glory;"; 
 the first sentence, for is a conjunction ; in the second it is a prepos 
 tion. 
 
 EXERCISE. — Onthe Adverb, Prepositioni and Conjunction 
 
 1. I have seen him once, and perhaps twice. ThirJ! 
 and lastly, I will conclude. The task is already perforn: 
 ed. We could not serve him then, but will hereafle; 
 They travelled in haste through France towards Ita!- 
 From virtue to vice the progress is gradual. We oiu 
 resolve, but seldom perform. We are wisely and happi 
 directed. How sweetly the birds sing ! Why art the 
 so heedless ? When will he arrive ^ Where shall u 
 stop? Mentally and morally we arc afllicted. He livt 
 within his income. The house was sold at a great pric 
 and above its value. 
 
 2. By diligence and frugality we arrive at competent 
 We are often below our wishes, and above our deser 
 Without the aid of charity he supported himself wk 
 credit. Though often advised, yet he does not reforn 
 We must live temperately if we would be health; 
 
 Question on Conjunctions. — Recite Ihelists of conjunctions. 
 
 Queslionit on Exercise. — 1. Point out the adverbs in the abr' 
 exercise. 2. Point out the prepositions. The conjunctions. \^li. 
 parts of speech arc all the other words 1 
 
 Questions on Conjunctions. — 2. What is the disjunctive ? i 
 
lARi 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 49 
 
 nd h\s brother resii 
 ill accompany mej 
 
 .od.» 
 
 3j.^pc. — - only to con 
 
 t also to express op. 
 
 'grees : as, " TAomj; 
 
 le did not reform ; 
 
 i'ay without her." 
 
 cipal conjunctions : 
 •th, for, therefore, i: 
 
 ugh, either, or, as, ur, 
 
 landing. 
 
 ised as a conjunction an 
 n : as, " I rest then upo 
 L before ;" in the first ser 
 it is an adverb. " I sut 
 contended for glory ;" ; 
 the second it is a prepos 
 
 tion, and Conjunctior 
 rhaps twice. ThirJ! 
 isk is already perforn, 
 1, but will hereafte: 
 i'rancc towards Ita!- 
 s gradual. We ofte 
 ire wisely and happi 
 sing ! Why art the 
 ^e ? Where shall v 
 re afflicted. He livt 
 s sold at a great pric; 
 
 arrive at competenc; 
 and above our deser 
 upported himself wk 
 t he does not reforn 
 3 would be health) 
 ! lists of conjunctions. 
 ; the adverbs in the abf 
 The conjunctions. Wli 
 
 i is the disjunctive ? 
 
 Hc^roof either softens or hardens its object* Neither 
 jpaiipiperity nor adversity has improved him. Charles is 
 eipemed, because he is both discreet and benevolent. John 
 iMIbe sooner than James. He is as old as his class-mate, 
 but not so learned. If thou wert his superior, thou shouldst 
 BjQt have boasted. One may easily deceive one's self. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Of Interjections. 
 
 1. Interjections are words thrown in between the parts 
 of a sentence to express the passions or emotions of the 
 speaker : as, Oh ! I have alienated my friend j Alas ! I 
 fear for life." 
 
 2^ Interjections are of various kinds : First ; of Sur- 
 jtfite ; as, Really ! sure ! strange ! Second ; of Grief or 
 earnestness : as, Ah ! alas ! O ! on ! Third ; of Con- 
 tempt : as, Pho ! fie ! fudge ! Fourth ; of Calling : as, 
 Lo ! behold I hark ! holloa ! ho ! Fifth ; o£ Saluting : as, 
 Welcome ! hail ! all hail ! 
 
 Questions on Interjections. — What is an interjection 1 2. What 
 are the various kinds of interjections 1 
 
 PARSING. 
 
 Parsing is usually denominated Etymological and Syntactical. 
 By the former tiic Etymology of the parts of speech is given ; by 
 the latter the rules of Syntax for the agreement, government or 
 pocition of words in a sentence, are shown. After the pupils have 
 carefully examined the foliowiiig table of parsing, which embraces 
 both the Etymological and Syntactical system, and the specimens 
 und(6r it, they may be employed in parsing with great advantage. It 
 18 by no means necessary that they should commit to memory all 
 the rules of Syntax before they proceed to this exercise ; but, hav- 
 ing learned the first rule, they should be obliged to correct and parse 
 the exercise under it, and taught to apply the rule ; and, as they ad- 
 Vmee, the same method should be observed, requiring Ihem at the 
 MUito time, if necessary, to apply the rules, wliich they hare already 
 coiliiittcd lo memory. 
 
 P 
 
 DmECTlONS FOR PARSING. 
 
 First determine what part of speech the word is, then 
 give all its attributes, according to the following system : 
 Article. Tell whether it is dclinite cr indefinite. 
 Noun. Tell whether it is proper or common, give its gen- 
 , der, number, and case ; if nominative case, point out 
 
11; 
 
 ill 
 
 i<\' 
 
 'fSfffiii. 
 
 !; !^( 
 
 ■l: IM 
 
 i;i 
 
 '!« 
 
 i 
 
 -:%i 
 
 50 
 
 ENGLISH tiRA^MAR. 
 
 the verb to which it is nominative ; or if nominativ; \\^pi 
 to no verb, tell what kind of nominative it is ; if it b( 
 
 • in the possessive or objective case, point the word h\ 
 which it is governed, and repeat the rule of Syntax fo 
 such government. 
 
 Adjective. Tell what degree of comparison, and wha; 
 word it qualifies. 
 
 Prmoun. Tell what kind ; if personal, tell its gender, 
 number, and case, and why it is in such case. 
 
 Ve)'h. Tell whether it is active, passive, or neuter ; regu- 
 lar, irregular, or defective ; tell its number, persdr 
 
 tive 
 
 in tl 
 
 poss 
 
 mon 
 
 and 
 
 cord 
 
 mood, and tense : what nominative it 
 
 agrees 
 
 wi 
 
 and give the rule of Syntax for such government. 
 Adverb. Tell whatkind, and what word it serves to qualify 
 Preposition. Tell the word it goveins. 
 Conjunction. Tell whether copulative or disjunctive, ar 
 
 point out the words or sentences it connects. 
 Intetjection. Tell the kind. 
 
 B 
 
 third 
 walk 
 thei 
 lar n 
 Bule 
 objec 
 articl 
 third 
 govei 
 
 Ci 
 
 SPECIMENS OF PARSING. 
 *' A virtuous son delights his fatlier's heart." 
 
 A is an indefinite article. Virtuous is an adjective 
 the positive degree and qualifies son. Son is a noi 
 common of the masculine gender, third person, singiil: 
 number, and nominative case to the verb delights, m P^fso 
 cording to Note 3, under Rule I, which says, &c. J) 
 lights is a regular active transitive verb, in the indicatii 
 mood, present tense, third person, singular number, 
 agree with its nominative case son, according to Rule 
 which says, See. ; and governs heart in the objective cas- 
 according to Rule IV. His is a possessive adjective pr 
 noun. Fathers is a noun common, of the masculine gcr 
 der, third person, singular number, and in the possessiv 
 case governed by the word heart, according to Rule V 
 
 Heart is a noun common, of the neuter gender, thir 
 
 The 
 
 then 
 
 in th< 
 
 toRu 
 
 tive 
 
 to an 
 
 l.A 
 
 then 
 
 the 
 
 Hide 
 
 person, singular number, in the objective case, nr ^"JJj® 
 governed by the active- transitive verb delights, accordir J®®^^ 
 
 to Rule IV ; and governs father'' s in the possessive Cl^^: . 
 according to Rule VII. P 
 
 a 
 ura 
 
 prepo 
 
 " Vutue will reward her followers." ^ 
 
 Virtue is a noun common, of the feminine gende ^ 
 
3BTTM0L0GY. 
 
 ^1 
 
 e; 
 
 Tiparison, and wha: in the objective case, according to Rule IV. 
 
 DOBsessive adiective pronoun. Folloivers is a i 
 
 ative it agrees witli 
 icli government 
 
 or if nominativ? (i^ person, singular number, and nominative case to 
 native it is ; if it bf i^jp reward. Will reivard is a regular active-transitive 
 !, point the word hj l|l^, of the indicative mood, first future tense, and in the 
 lie rule of Syntax fo ^wd person, singular number, to agree with its nomina- 
 tive case virtue, according to Rule I, and governs followers 
 
 Her is a 
 possessive adjective pronoun. Folloivers is a noun com- 
 jnal, tell its gender, mon, of die common gender, third j»erson, plural number, 
 in sucli case. and in the objective case governed by will reward) ac- 
 
 ;ivc, or neuter ; rcgii' cording to Rule IV. 
 its number, persor ''lie walked into the garden." 
 
 Se is a personal pronoun, of the masculine gender, 
 third pei-son, singular number, and nominative case to 
 )rdit serves to qualify yf^JJ^ed. TFrt?^-eo? is a regular active -intransitive verb, of 
 IS. the indicative mood, imperfect tense, third person, singu- 
 
 ve or disjunctive, ar. \^j number, to agree with its nominative he, acrording to 
 es it connects. Rule I. Into is a preposition, and governs garden in the 
 
 objective case, according to Rule V. The is a definite 
 article. Garden is a noun common, of the neuter gender, 
 third person, singular number, and in the objective case 
 governed by the preposition into, according to Rule V, 
 
 *' Cicero, the orator, was a man of superior talents." 
 ■ Cicero is a noun proper, of the masculine gender, third 
 person, slnguku' number, and nominative case to was. 
 Thei& a definite article. Orator 
 erh in "the Tndicath *^® masculine gender, third person, singular nun 
 ^..nmilnr numbpr ^^ ^^® nominative case, in apposition to Cicero, according 
 to Rule X. Was is an irregular neuter verb, of the indica- 
 tive mood, imperfect tense, third person, singular number, 
 
 ;siNG. 
 atlier's heart." 
 mis is an adjective 
 son. Son is a noi 
 third person, singuk 
 die verb delights, a: 
 hich says, &c. D 
 rb, in the ind 
 singular number, 
 according to Rule 
 
 is a noun common, of 
 
 imber, and 
 
 t in the objective ca?- 
 
 ssessive adjective pr 
 
 to agree with its nominative case Cicero, according to Rule 
 
 I. A is an indefinite article. 3Ian is a noun comrijon, of 
 
 ' ^ , . , T,j^ the masculine gender, third person, singular number, and 
 
 ^" '" 4 D "i. VI the nominative case after the verb vms, according to 
 
 iccording to Kule V ^^ ^^ ^^.^ ^ preposition, and governs talents in the 
 
 ; neuter genaer, u. ^^^^^ ^,^^^^^ according to Rule V. Siiperior is an ad- 
 
 objective case, . _ ^^^^^^ -^ ^,^^ ^^^.^.^^ j^^^,^^^ qualifying talents. TalenU 
 
 erb rfcii:7/«f5,^accor^ui jg ^ ^^^^^ common, of the neuter gender, third person, 
 
 in the possessiv ' pjuj^l number, and in the objective case governed by the 
 
 preposition of, according to Rule V. 
 rollowcrs." « jl^g ^^^^ ^yjjg Ijy^g virtuously, will be rewarded." 
 
 f the feminine genUe ^^ .^ ^ ^.^j^^.^^ pronoun, and has wan for its antece- 
 
I- 
 
 i ! ''' 
 
 f r I"!.. 
 
 i '-i! 
 
 •'!* \ 
 
 1 .':'.; 
 
 ^1 
 
 52 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 aOi 
 
 dent. Lives is a regular neuter verb, in the indicativt 
 mood, present tense, third person, singular number, t 
 agree with its nominative who, according to Rule XII 
 Virtuously is an adverb of manner o" quality. Will h 
 rewarded, is a regular passive verb, in the indicative moot 
 first future tense, and third person singular, agreeing wi; 
 its nominative man, according to Rule I. 
 
 "To err is human." 
 To err is a verb in the infinitive mood. Is is ; 
 irregular neuter verb, of the indicative mood, present tcn^ 
 third person singular, to agree with its nominative to cr 
 according to Note under Rule I. Human is an adjectiv: 
 qualifying nature understood, according to Rule XVII. 
 
 *' Let mc go." 
 Let is an irregular active-transitive verb, in the inipc: 
 tive mood, second person singular or plural, to agree n 
 its nominative thou, or i/e ox you understood, and govei 
 me in the objective case, according to Rule IV, and ;i 
 governs r^o in the infinitive mood, according to Rule^VI! ment 
 Me is a personal pronoun, of the first person singui: anotli 
 common gender, and in the objective case governe 
 
 mi 
 2 
 the 
 
 chie 
 
 ord 
 
 actii 
 
 goes 
 
 dene 
 
 gove 
 
 g<ne\ 
 
 objei 
 
 3. 
 
 and I 
 
 Cc 
 anoti: 
 
 let, according to Rule IV. Go is an irregular activ 
 intransitive verb, in the infinitive mood, present ten 
 the sign to being understood, and governed by let, accoi 
 ing to Rule VIH. 
 
 J 
 
 No 
 pound 
 Impfr 
 "I « 
 
 trailoi 
 
 To 
 and pi 
 
 PART III. 
 SYNTAX. Anoli 
 
 1. The third part of Grammar is Syntax, which Iro 
 
 of the agreement and construction of words in a scntciK Ml 
 
 A sentence is an assemblage of words, forming a conipi will 
 
 sense. Sentences are of two kinds, simple and compot; pr 
 
 A simple sentence has in it but one suijjectand one fiiliarjr 
 
 verb ; as, " Life is short." A compound sentence rrendej 
 
 8ists of two or more simple sentences connected togetlr^udesr 
 
 QfXM/ion on Sijntax. — 1. Wliat is the lliird part of grammar. <^ue\ 
 of what d(K;H it treat 1 What is a «cntoiic<; I IIoav many kiiul-'entoB 
 sienlcnccs ? What in a simple sentence 1 Compound sentence '•id o 
 phrusc '{ )Vhit i 
 
lR. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 53 
 
 rb, in the indicativi 
 singular number, t 
 ording to Rule XII 
 0" quality. Will '< 
 I the indicative niooc 
 ingular, agreeing wr: 
 lie I. 
 
 ve mood. Is is 
 e mood, present tony 
 its nominative to cr 
 
 Life is short, and art is long," A phrase is two or 
 
 words, fornning generally a part of a sentence, and 
 
 itimes a whole sentence ; as, " He endeavoured in a 
 
 Hcular manner, to show his friendship." "It is fey 
 
 'tifi means just." 
 
 2. Principal parts of a simple sentence are the suhjecf, 
 th0 attribute, and the object. The subject is the thing 
 chiefly spoken of; the attribute is thethingoraction affirmed 
 OP denied of it ; and the object the thing afiected by such 
 action. The nominative denotes the subject, and usually 
 1 TO " 8<*®8 before the verb or attribute ; and tlu3 word or phrase, 
 
 "i- t-' denotiniT the ol)iect, follows the verb ; as, " A wise man 
 -fwinan IS an auiectu: t> j 5 . • .i i- ^ 
 
 lumuib'^ XVII governs his j)assions. Here, a rvise man, la the subject; 
 Jmg to liU • g(jfiD^fns^ tjie attribute, or thing affirmed ; and pamons, the 
 
 object. 
 ,'e verb, in the impcr $4 Syntax principally consists of two parts, ConcorLl 
 3r plural, to agree \v and Government. 
 
 ndcrstood,and govei Concord is the agreement, which one word has with 
 ; to Rule IV, and n another, in gender, luunber, case, or person. Govern- 
 ccording to Rule^Vl. ment'. is that power, which one part of speech has over 
 
 first person singiii another, in directing its niooti, tense, or case, 
 live case governeu 2Vbte. — Hesides tlic division of sentences into simple and com- 
 is an irregular activ pound they an; also divided into Explicative, Intcrro^^ative, and 
 
 By tiie lii?l something is declared or cxpliiined ; as, 
 
 I mood, present ten Impet»tive. By the ih^i somd 
 
 1 1 7 .# ^npnt » write; he is loved;" by tl 
 
 overned by Id, accoi ,, ^^^ .^ j^^l^^^ ^„ ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^ 
 
 traitor.' 
 
 le second ii question is asked ; as, 
 command is given ; as^ '' liu, thou 
 
 To analyse a conipound sentence is to show the yimplc sentences 
 and phrases of >vhich it comMsts. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Analyse the foVowhi<j .sottcnres, and thoio the aimple 
 is Syntax, which tro senfoio's of whkh fhei/ conaist. 
 
 I of words in a scntcn' Many are tlie trials of the virtiiou;?, but their reward 
 ords forming a coin]i will bo grenl. It is iin important truth, that religion, 
 s s"imple and compo\: pra(|ft8ed witii sincerity, is the most powerful auxi- 
 le Bimiecl and one fiil'Mf of reason in promotini^r that peace of mind which 
 ompound sentence i renders ns traiuiuil and haj)i)y under all the vicissi- 
 K'cs connected togetli'ndea of life. A virtuous son loves his mother, venerates 
 ir third part of grammnr, iiiUttions on Syntax.— 2. What arc llic prinripa' parts of a simple 
 It-nee { llow many kiiiil-'®*'*^*** ^ ^^'"'t '» "if^ subject 1 Attribute '( The olijert 'I What is 
 [•el Compound sentence '•*<* of the nominative, &c. '{ :i. Of iviiat docs Syntax conslit '< 
 ^ ' »Vhgti» concord { What ■< u;ovcrnmcnt '< 
 
f t 
 
 .11 
 
 ':§ 
 
 :i i i 
 
 ijr i;( 
 
 
 im 
 
 I "I 
 
 i'l'i^l 
 
 54 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 his father, and hearkens to their admonitions ; he is at ail 
 times condescending to iiis fnend>:, respectful to strangers, 
 and obedient to his siiperiors. No man can serve two 
 masters : for he will either despise the one, and cling t. 
 ihc other ; or serve the one, and despise the other. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 A Verb must agree with its nominative case in nunihc 
 
 and person ; as, " I leaniy" " Thou art improved," " The 
 
 birds .<f2;?7." 
 
 Note 1. — Tlif infinitive mnod, or part of a sentcnco, is somcfiiDs 
 put UK nDitiinativc c :is<» (o the verb ; as, " ^1 dr.>iire to excel others ; 
 virtue and Irarnin^^ is oommondablc." The infinitive inood mr 
 also be t;tl<(Mi as llie objective case after an active verb; as, " T 
 Ixjvs love, to jilay ;" '' The }!,irls love lo wor/c." Tlie infinitive nii- 
 in Itotb the aiiovc instances has much the nature of a substantiv 
 eyprtssiii'j; the action itself wliich the verb signified ; for the sentenc* 
 "The iiovs love to play,*' is Uie same as, "The boys love y*/(/;, 
 the girls love work" &c. 
 
 y.ilc •?. — Every fjrm of the verb, except the infinitive mooi! 
 parlicip'e, f)u;^ht to have a nominative case either expressed or in 
 jtlied ; as, •• Awake ; arise ;" that is, " Awake rje, uiise j/f." 
 
 Note []. — Every nominative case, except the case absolute, ni 
 wluMi an address is made to a person, should belong; to some vc 
 eilher ex!)r<'-ised or itnplied ; as, " Who wrote this book i"' " John. 
 that is, •• Jnhii wrote it." 
 
 Nitc 1. — When a verb comes between two nntiiis, cither of whir 
 may bii understood as the subject of the aHirnuition, it may np 
 with eitlier of them, but most generally with that which stmi 
 nearer to it; as, " Hi.>nneut was locusts and «ild honey;" "T 
 wa}!;es of sill ts death." 
 
 Not"i). — When tlie nominative case has no personal tense of i 
 vrrlt, but is phie( d bcftjre a participle, independent of tiie rest of ' 
 senleii'-(\ ii i-t called the ease ab>>olut-! ; us, " S/iame beinj>; lost, 
 virtue is lostt" 
 
 Not' ('.. — The nominative case is generally placed before the vcr 
 bill it is sometiMies pit iif;( r the verb in a simple tense, and betwi 
 the verb i r p.nticiplc in a roinpound tense. Th(i folluwiiiiij are i 
 priiu'iiK.i eases n whi^ii t!w verb precedes the nominative ; — 
 
 Flr'.l. — W lu ii a iiiu<*i,in is asked, a command iriven. or a ^^ 
 expn' x'll : its, •' Confided t'.iou in iiie '. Head lliou : Long liv( ; 
 queen." 
 
 Sc.^nml — Wi^n a pup insit'on ii made without the pnnjunr'i 
 }/■; as, '• w. r.' .i not t i llii.-.," '* Hud I been ihere." 
 
 Third, — Wli"i llio urb it .im-eded by tlm adverbs here, tfn 
 Ihcii, th\ <, ke. ; ««, " Here a n I ; There was he Bluin ; Then > 
 ty.,K. of II -■ t>ve!v • } I'll i: elide! .hi; aiiair." 
 
 our 
 tis, 
 
 ilUR 
 
 Th 
 
I, 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 55 
 
 )nitions ; he is at aii 
 spectful to stranger?, 
 man can serve two 
 le one, and cling t> 
 pise the other. 
 
 alive case in niinilu 
 rrf improvvw, 
 
 -d " " 'W 
 
 a sentence, is sonictin)- 
 1 dcfiire to excel others : 
 rhc infinitive mood ms 
 » active verb; as, "T- 
 /r." Theitifinitivciiii' 
 niitiire of a subslaiitiv 
 fi^iiilit'd ; for the senttiio 
 !, •' The boys love plui 
 
 >pt Ibc infinitive mooil 
 [! «'ith(T cxi)n'sfse(l j)r in. 
 wake rje, uiise i/r." 
 pt the rase absolute, ni 
 )ul(l bclnnnj to some vf 
 ote this book /" " John. 
 
 wo iKunis, cither of whir 
 
 afiirmation, it may ngr 
 
 \\M\ that which slim 
 
 mid wild honey;" "T 
 
 IS no persotiiil tense of' 
 cpendciit of the rest of ' 
 s, " Shame \m\\^ lost, 
 
 ally pbired before the v.t 
 siiiiple tense, and betW' 
 '. The f()lluwin}j; are i 
 
 s the uoniiiiative ; — 
 CMtinniind i;iven. or a v 
 Head thou : Long live i 
 
 e willvMit the coiijnnc' 
 been iliere." 
 »y tlie adverbs here, lh< 
 •(• was he slain ; Theti * ' 
 
 ^hsirtKilion. — The phrases, as follows, as appears, Stc, are 
 etimcs called impersonal verbs, and should be confined to the 
 ular number, and such as follow, auch as appear, to the plural ; 
 have the following construction; "as it follows ; as it appears; 
 arguments Avere'sucA as follow,''* &c. The expressions, mcthinks 
 7nelhousht, av.em to be exceptions to Rule I; as, " 3Iethink8 
 ar ;" " Methought that all was lost." The pronoun in the first 
 person singular, and in the objective case, is taken as nominative to 
 tKe verb in the tliird person singular. These anomalies in the 
 l^inguage are fcAV, and seem to Avcar in some respects the character 
 of adverbial phrases. 
 
 N. B. — The pupils may be required to correct the exercises tliat 
 filllow the rules, either in writing or verbally, at the discretion of 
 the Teacher ; it would, however, be better to allow the scholars, 
 ifhile they are studying the grammar for the first time, to correct the 
 exercises verbally, and afterwards to furnish a written correction of 
 the same. The numbers to the exercises correspond with the num- 
 bers attaclied to the notes under the respective rule. As the rules 
 of Syntax arc generally short, questions on them have been dispensed 
 with. 
 
 EXERCISE — For Correction. 
 
 The school of experience tench many useful lessons. 
 Disappointments sinks the heart of man, hnt the renevN nl 
 of hope give cojisolation. The fame of this person and 
 of his actirns were dilTused throughout the country. The 
 inquisit;.'- "^ "•f^nerally talkative.' What signifies good 
 opinions .! ^ rjr conduct is had? We may suppose 
 there was n ^ impostors than one. I have considered 
 what have hoen said on hoth sides. If thou would be 
 healthy, live temperately. lie canst not Ijjamo me. He 
 shonldst have written before this time. A variety of 
 blenings liavc been conferred upon us. In ])ioty and 
 virtue consist the linppiness of man. 
 
 1* To live so!)erly and piously are required of all men. 
 To restrain their jta<sions are their delight ; fo conijuer 
 evil habits are their glory. To he temperate in eating 
 and drinking, to take exercise in the open air, and t«)pre- 
 setVP the niuid fwe from tutnnlluous emotions, is the best 
 preaervativ(s of be:'lth. That it is our duty to [iromoto 
 the purity of our minds and hoihes, to he just an*' kind to 
 our felUnv crcatuivs, and to he faithl'ul :o Him that made 
 us, admit tiot of any doubt in a rali^nrl mind. The in- 
 duitrious hve to work. Tho v.iin lo\e tj be admired. 
 The fctiidious desire to imnrove. 
 
56 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 2. If the privileges, whicli he lias long enjoyed, shoiiii; 
 now be wrested from him, would be a flagrant injustice, ^ 
 These articles we imported from China, and arc similar tc ^ 
 those which we brought from Africa. ™ 
 
 WE 
 
 3. Virtue, however it may be neglected for a lime 
 
 men are so constituted as ultimately to acknovvledi'i. ^, 
 
 the 
 ccnume merit, 
 
 '^ ©HI 
 
 4<. The crown of virtue is peace and honour. Hi: 
 chief occupation and emi)loymcnt were controversy. 
 
 5. Him being destroyed, the j)lacc may be easily taken } 
 
 The l)usiness being concluded, the Senate adjourned, noi 
 The cloth being removed from the table, he desired the 
 servant to bring in the wine. Charles being absoii; 
 Henry was unable to perform the task. 
 
 Sole. — In llie thice last seiitciifcs no errors will be found; t: 
 ^vj^iil is only required to point out the case ubsolule. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 Two or more nouns, or a noun and pronoun, in tl. 
 .^iii-mlar number, connected by a copulative coniiinctit^ 
 cxjncssed or undorstooa, nuist nave verbs, nouns, an noun 
 pronoum, agreeing with them in tlie plural number ; a- them 
 *' Socrates and Plato atr.ro wise : t/ici/ ivcre the nic- P""®"* 
 eminent )>h'dosopli(jrs ol b recce. ' 
 
 Note — Ifllio singular nouns and pronouns, which arc conncft( 
 by a copulative conjunction, be of several persons, in niakinj; I: 
 plural pronoun agree witii them, in person the second takes place 
 the tliird, and the first of both ; as, " Tliou and he may slian 
 between i/ou;" " James, and thou, and I, arc tttlacltcd to v 
 country." 
 
 Obscrvalion. — When liio nouns arc nearly related, or scarcely i!. 
 tinguisluible in seii«e, and t;;^nietinies even wiien Ihcy are very dill( 
 I lit, .sonic authors have tiiougiil it allowable to put tlic verbs, noui 
 and pronouns in t!ie singular nunilier ; as, " Tranquillity and peU' pro^ 
 dwclh liere." 'llicv support the above construction by saying i tlje^^ 
 the v( rlt tn.iy be umierituod ; as, " TrarKiuillily dwells here and pt :ii 
 dwells here;" but it is evidently contrary to the first principlcb . *l 
 ^raniinar to consider two disthicl ideas us one. per 
 
 Exi;RciSE — For Correction. ^vrit 
 
 The prince and the people was to blame. Virtiif 2' 
 honoiii', nay, even self-interest, conspires to recoinnici pres 
 the incasiire. Tiio ship ;uui all the cargo was dcstroyc tainl 
 Tranciuillity and peace dwells here. In unity consists ti care 
 ■wclfiiro and security of every society. Timo and li' pror 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 57 
 
 3ng enjoyed, shoiiiu 
 a flagrant injustice, 
 1, and arc similar to 
 
 TJccted for a lime 
 'iv to acknovvledgi 
 
 e and honour. Hi; 
 ere controversy, 
 may be easily taken 
 B Senate adjouriicii. 
 able, he desired the 
 liarlea being absoiu 
 
 errors willbc found; t: 
 •ibsohUc, 
 
 and pronoun, in tl 
 
 lits for no man. Patience and diligence, like faifh, 
 overf mountains. Ignorance and negligence has caused 
 mibtake. Washington and Jellersoii was patriots, they 
 
 s devoted to his country. 
 
 1. Thou, the gardener, and the huntsman, may share 
 blanio hotwoea them. Henry, John, and I, are daily 
 employed at their respective occupations. 
 
 RULE iir. 
 
 ■When a disjunctive conjunction occurs between two 
 nouns or pronouns, the verl), nuiai, or pronoun referring 
 to them, must he in the singuhu* munber ; as, " Ignorance 
 of negngeiice haa caused this mistake ;" " John, James, 
 or Joseph iulemls to accompany me." 
 
 Note 1. — When .singular nciuus, or a noun and pronoun, of dif- 
 ferent ponidii:;, iirc disjunctively connected, tlie verb must iis;,rce witli 
 that jjcrsou niiicli is placed ncurc.«t tu it; as, "1 or thou art to 
 blame;" " Tliou or 1 urn in I'uult." 
 
 Note -. — Wiion a disjunctive occiu's b(!t»ccn a singular noun (t 
 
 opulative conjunciio pronoun, ;ind a plural one, the Acrb must agree ivilli the plural 
 
 v'c verbs f nouns, an 
 le plural number ; a- 
 ; tliei/ loere the nic^ 
 
 )un8, which arc connccti 
 
 il persons, in making i: 
 n the second takes place 
 riiou and he may shan 
 d I, arc uUadicd to u 
 
 noun or pnjn(;un ; a.s, *' Neither poverty nor riches were injurious tu 
 them}" " I or they were otleMded i)y it." but the, plural noun or 
 pronoun, ivhen it can be conveniently done, should be placed next 
 to the verb. 
 
 EX K Rc IS E . — For Corredloii. 
 
 Man's 1) ppmess or misery are in a great measure 
 placed in hi« own hands. In many minds there are 
 neither kiiuwiedge nor mulerstanding. Speaking impa- 
 tiently, or any thing that hetrays iMattt-ntion oi' lil-hmnour, 
 are certainly criminal. VViien sickness, inlirmity, or 
 reverse i»f fortune alUict us, the sincerity of Iriendshij) is 
 Death, or somj worse misfortune, soon separate 
 
 I or thou am tiie 
 (Jeoi'^e or I has 
 
 irly related, or scarcely i! 
 
 \ when they arc very dilli 
 
 ble to put the verbs, noui 
 
 s, " Tranrpiillity and pen provec 
 
 construction by saying i: theOi* 
 
 "'":'^:l;''r«rn?iuc!lr' i* ^^i^''^'- ^l'<>" '^i- I «''t mistaken. 
 irv to Ihc tirat pnncipitii ^ '^ 
 
 yuj,^ pefior:. 1 hou or lie art the man. 
 
 .. ^ written. 
 
 jrrcctwn. 
 
 as to blame. VirUK 2. l^oth of the scholars, or one of them at least, was 
 )nspireH to recomnici present. The ship was recovered, bnt neither the cap- 
 he cargo was destroyt'> tain nor >ailors saveti. The deceitl\ilness of riches or the 
 J. In unity consists 11 cares ol" lift' inis choked the seeds vi' virtue in many a 
 locietv. Time and H' promisijig mind. 
 
58 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 V i 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 Active-transilive verbs govern the objective case ; as, 
 
 ** Truth ennobles her;" " Slie comforts me ;" " He closed 
 
 the book;" " Virtue rewards her follower s.^^ 
 
 Note. — Neuter verbs of motion and change are varied like the 
 active, and also admit the . 'ssive form, retaining still the neuter 
 signification ; as, " I come, 'ihou comest, lie comes, I go, he goes ;" 
 iic. Passive form, '• 1 am come, Thuu art come, He is come, I 
 am gone, lie is gone," &,c. 
 
 Observation. — Sometimes a part of a sentence is taken as the 
 objective case after an attive-transilivo vcib ; as, '' Let us consider 
 how pleasing is the practice of virtue, and how great will be the 
 reward." 
 
 Neuter verbs never act npon or govern an objective case ; but 
 certain aclivc-intiansitivc verbs admit after them in some few in- 
 •tunces an object, and may in those cases be taken as active-transi- 
 live ; as, "To dream a dream; He runs a race; He walks the 
 horse; She danced the child." Active-transitive verbs are some- 
 times improperly made intransitive ; •' He thinks to ingratiate wiUi 
 him by calumniating me;" ii should bo, " to ingratiate himself. 
 
 E X E Rc IS E — For Correction . 
 
 They, who opulence lias made proud, and who luxury- 
 has corrupted, cannot relish the simple pleasures of 
 nature. He and they we know. Tlie man, who he 
 raised from obscurity, is dead. Who did they entertain 
 ao iVeely ? That is the irieod, who you should receive. 
 He invited niv brother and I to see him. He, who 
 committed the ollence, you should correct, and not I who 
 am innocent. They, who he had most injured, he had 
 the greatest reason to love. 
 
 1. ITsuch maxims and such practices prevail, what 
 has become of decency and virtue ? Tlie whole obliga* 
 tion of that law and covenant has also ceased. The 
 mighty rivals are now at length agreed. He was enter- 
 ed into tlic connection before the consequences were 
 considered. 
 
 RULE V. 
 
 Prepositions govern the objective case ; as, " I havo 
 heard a iiood cliaracler o//<er ;" ^^ From him, that is 
 needy, turn not away." 
 
 Note 1. — Theprt'pi)siiinns,/o,/t)r, and /Vo//i, are often understood, 
 chielly be(or(^ pronduns; as, *• liivc mc tiie bciokj (Jet mc tiic 
 paper;" that is, '* to uic^for me." 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 59 
 
 lan, who he 
 
 Note 2. — The preposition is often improperly separated from tlie. 
 relative which it governs ; as, " Whom will I give it to V instead of 
 *' To whom will 1 give it i" 
 
 Observation. — Participles are sometimes used as prepositions, 
 such as excepting, respecting, concerning, &tc. ; as, '"lie saiii 
 notliing concerning my friend." Diilerenl relations, and ditlereni 
 senses, niust ho cxj)ressed hy different prcp(jsitions ; Thus we may 
 say, '• He conversed with a person ujion Uic suhject in a ccrtuiit 
 iiousc." 
 
 An accurate and appropriate use of the prepositions is cf great 
 importance. Fast. The preposition of is often improperly useii 
 lor on, in, Itc. ; as, " llu is resolved of going to luc city ;" 
 '* on going." " He was dependent o/the crown ;'' " on the crown." 
 '' He w as eager of reeonnnending ii ;" " in reconnnendiiig it." 
 Second. 'To and y or are often incorrectly used fur other prepusiuons ; 
 as, *' Vou have bestowcJ yuur favours /y tlie most deserving person j" 
 " upon the mtjst" &,c. "• He was accused for betraying tne interests 
 of the country ;" " of betraying" Sic. " In compliance to Ihe 
 declaration ;" " witli,'^ iStc. 'Tnird. With respect to the preposi- 
 tions wit/i., on, upon, in, from, &c., they are frequently misuppiitU , 
 as, " He reconciled himself iiJt//t the khig;" " to ihe king;" " Hau 
 I thought on it, 1 would have done it;" '* thought of it;" " They 
 should be informed t/i some purLs el his character;' ubuut or Con- 
 ' H« look them into his ciiary;e," "• under lii-t 
 
 O^i 
 
 ccrning some parts.' 
 
 charge." *' The variety of factions into which the country is 
 engaged ;" " in which." " He should profit from experience ;" 
 " ^^ experience." The preposition /o is put before nouns of place 
 when preceded by verbs of motion ; as, " 1 went to the city." 
 
 EX.EUC liSK — i« or Correction. 
 
 We ai'C all accouiitablo civatuiocs, each for his-self. 
 To who will I give it ? It is not willi 1 thai lie iseiigagea. 
 They willingly and t)l' theiisielves ondeavouieil l4) take up 
 iho tlelence. He laid the «iisj)icion ii[)on sonnsbody, i 
 know not who, in tiie company, fie is u liiend, u lio i 
 am highly indebted to. Who do yon s^peak to i 
 
 1. L^'nd me youi' hat. Give John the book. Gel 
 him the j)aper. He was banished lite country. 
 
 '2, To have no friend, vviiom we heartily uisii well to, 
 anil whom we are warmly concerned for, is a deplorable 
 stale. Whom did you receive it from i* 
 
 IILLE VI. 
 
 rarticiple.s, derived from active-transitive verbs, govern 
 the ol)jeclive » asc ; as, '» Seeing his/WtW in distress, he 
 assisted him." "Having finished ihe lettct', ho sent ii 
 to the ollice." " Having finished ina work, he subauUcd 
 
 
 
 m' 
 
 i ■ 
 
 '4 
 
 ' > 
 
 • Ii 
 
 r 
 
60 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 V'h 
 
 
 Note 1. — Wlicn the perfect participle ami imperfect tense are dif . 
 fcrent in form, the latter must not be used for llie former ; as, ii is 
 irapropcr to say ; " lie befiun ; lie nta ; Tlu'y come ; Charles 
 done it ;" it sliould be ; " lie bcqan ; lie ran ; They came ; Charles 
 did it." 
 
 Observation. — When a participle is taken as tlie subject of the verb, 
 or tiie object of an action or of a iciaiion, it becomes a noun, and is 
 called a, participial noun ; as, '^'Reading is useful ;" lie commenced 
 at the bci^inning ; "•' iMucli depends on the rule's being observed.. A 
 [tarticipial noun may govern Ihe objective case; as, ''John was sent 
 to prepare the ivay by preaching repentance.''' *' Her employmciil 
 is drau'ing maps." *'.\lucli dciiends on their observing the rule." 
 In these cases, houcver, it is better to insert the ailicle, and preposi- 
 tion o/", after tne pari icipial noun, by wliich all anibiguhy respecting 
 the govenimeiit will be avoided ; as, ''the preacliing o/" repentance j" 
 '•' the (observing o/"tlie rule j" " tiie drawing cf maps.-' The partici- 
 ple is sometimes used witiiout relVrence to any noun ; as, " Generally 
 speaking, his conduct uas good." 
 
 i:.vt:i{(:isE — For Currecllon. 
 
 Esfociniiig tlioirscMves wise, they became fools. I 
 cuuiil iiDt avoid considering tliey in some tiegroe as 
 enenues to nie. Siispectini;; not only tliou, but tiiuy also, 
 I have avoiiled all intercoinse. 
 
 1. By beina; too easier in the pin'suit he run a great risk 
 of belli;: disappointed, lie was greatly heated, and drunk 
 \vith avidity. He boj^un the work early. They have 
 format it. He has mistook his true interest, and he now 
 funis himself Ibisook bv former friends. The coat had 
 lu) se;mi, but it was wove thronu'liout. He would 
 have went wiiii us, had lie been iiivitnl. They, who 
 have bore a [>art of the labour, shall share the reward. 
 The niK's have been broke. The French language is 
 much spoke. 
 
 RULE VII. 
 
 One noun <iovcrns anotliei', siiiififying a dilferent thing, 
 
 in the possessivt^ or L^enitive case ; as, " My father's 
 
 house j" " \'irtti>'''s rewanl ;" " .V(//i',v hapi)iness." 
 
 Pronouns in the possessive case arc also governed by the 
 
 noims which follow them ; as, " Every tree is known 
 
 by its fruit." 
 
 >4»-Vo/o 1. — Wiien several nouns come togtther in the possessive 
 case, tlie 'ipostrophc uitii the h I'er s is annexed t» tiie last and un- 
 derstood to the rest j as, '• John and i:.7u«'4 books;" "This is my 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 Ci 
 
 father, mother, and uncle^s advice." But, if any words intervene, 
 it is proper that the si*n of the possessive shonld be annexed to 
 each ; as, " They arc Jb/ni's, as well as Eliza^s, books." 
 
 Note 2. — In poetry the additional s is frequently omitted, but the 
 apostrophe retained; as, "The wrath of i\'/c(ts' son." Some- 
 times, also, the apostrophic s is omitted even iti prose, particularly 
 whun it occiisijns a hissing sound, or a dillieulty of pronunciation ; 
 as, " For conscience^ sake;" '•' For goodness^ sake." 
 
 Note 3. — Little explanatory circumstances shoidd nf)t be used 
 between the possessive case, and the words which follow it ; as, 
 *' S!ic extolled her friend's excellent work, as she called him ;" or 
 better, *• the excellent work of her frietid." 
 
 Xotc 1. — When a sentence consists of terms signifying; a name 
 and an otfice, that which signllics the name of the person sliould be 
 put in the possessive case; as, "I left llie parcel at Sinilh''s the 
 bookseller." A phrase, in which the words are so closely eoimectcd 
 as to admit of no pause before the conclusion, requires the possessive 
 ;5ign at or near the end of tlie phrase : as, " Whose prerogative is 
 it ? It is the queen of Great Britatii^s;^' "The lord mayor of Zon- 
 (lon^s authority." Nouns in appttsition, which follow eacli other hi 
 quick suorcssion, have also the po.«sessive sign ; as, " The emperor 
 Leopold^ s ;^' " For David my scrvunt^s sake." 
 
 Note 5. — If tlie application of the possi.'ssive case should occasion 
 ;iii unpleasant sound, the particle of, whidi expresses t!ie same rela- 
 tion, should be used in its place; as, '• The general in lli<' (ninifa 
 name ;" it should be, " in the name of the army :" " Tlie Cuin- 
 mons' vote:" '•' O/' tlie Commons;" " Tiic counlnfs eoiiclilion ;" 
 '• 0/the country ;" ''The king in parliament's name;" " in the 
 name of parliament." 
 
 Note G. — In some cases both the possessive termination and the 
 prepositioTi uf may be used ; as, " It is a discovery of Sir Isaac 
 Newton^ s.** 
 
 Observation. — The pronoim /a'.s, when used apart from the noun 
 to which it rehitf's, is to be considered as the posst3si\t! case of the 
 personal pronoun; but when united with a noun, as a possessive 
 adjective pronoun: as, '"'Tlie bock is not mine, but //is;" "This 
 composition is ///s ;" '• Ills house ; his hat," 
 
 When an entire clause of a sentence, beginning v.'ith a present 
 participle, is used as one name, or to express an idea or circum- 
 stance, the noun, on which it <lepend«, mav he put in tl 
 case; as, "' Much will ilepi'iid (lu liic; ynf/zi'/'s cumpusii 
 on his reading frequently.'' 
 
 E X E RC [s n — For Cotre^flon. 
 
 My ancestors virtue i^; n )t ih'iik}. 
 
 will not condemn liini. I will not 
 
 ton sake'.s. A muliicrrj t^M^]crn(.•^^s' 
 
 are natin'e.-^ iriri:^' for niarihs ;i(JvanlaL"' 
 
 ■ posiiesMve 
 ,:,', Imt more 
 
 His hrotiK i-s oniMice 
 
 dt'stroy the city lor 
 
 ami a lailiors caro 
 
 A mans manner'?^ 
 
 .'Hi 
 
 C 2 
 
 nr 
 
 •'i 
 
6S 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 .1 f^ 
 
 frequently influence his fortune. Wisdoms precept^ 
 form the good mans interest. 
 
 1. It was the men's, women's, and children's lot to 
 suffer. Peter's, John's, and Andrew's occupation was 
 that of fishermen. 
 
 2. And he cast himself down at Jesus feet. Mosea 
 rod was turned into a serpent. For Herodias sake, his 
 brother Philips wife. 
 
 3. They condemned the prodigal's, as he was called, 
 extravagant conduct. They obeyed the protector's, as 
 they styled him, imperious mandates. 
 
 4. I bought the paper at Moore's, the bookseller's. 
 The silk was purchased at Brown's, the mercer's. This 
 palace had been the grand sultan's Mahomet's. I will 
 not for David's thy father's sake. 
 
 5. The world'a government is not left to chance. She 
 married my son's wife's brother. It is not necessary to 
 have the physician's and surgeon's advice. 
 
 6. This picture of the king's does not much resemble 
 him. The estate of the corporation's is much encumbered. 
 
 What can be the cause of parliament neglecting the 
 business ? Much depends on the rule being observed. 
 The lime of William making the experiment arrived. 
 
 RULE vni. 
 
 One verb governs another, that follows it, or depends 
 upon it, in the infinitive mood ; as, " Cease to do evil ;" 
 " Learn to do well ;'' " We ought to love our enemies." 
 
 Note 1. — VVIien the infinitive mood is preceded by the verba bid^ 
 dare, need, sec, make, hear, feel, and let, the sign to is generally 
 omittt'd ; as, " I bade him do it ; You dare not strike him ; They 
 need not proceed ; I saw him doit ; I heard him say it ; Let Charles 
 read.'' 
 
 Note 2. — The infinitive mood is frequently governed by adjectives, 
 nouns, and participlua ; as, " He is eager to learn;" They have a 
 desire to improve •," " Endeavouring to persuade*" 
 
 Observation.— The infinitive mood is sometimes made absolute, or 
 independent of the rest of the sentence ; as, " To confess the truth, I 
 was in fault." '' To speak candidly, I do not know." The infini- 
 tive mood is occasionally put after the word as in the following man- 
 ner'; " Since lie was so candid as to acknowledi;e his fault, I will. 
 I^ardon bim." '* Fear notliing so much aa to commit a fault." 
 
 N( 
 
SrWTAX. 
 
 6a 
 
 enemies.' 
 
 EXERCISE — For Correction. 
 
 1. I dare not to proceed so hastily lest I should give 
 offence. He bade his friend to receive the favour. We 
 have seen him to go into the house. They heard the bird 
 to sing. Let the boy to read. He made me to do it. I 
 bid him to say it. The multitude wondered when they 
 saw the lame to walk and the blind to see. Charles 
 saw him to commit the fault. Let the bird to go. 
 
 RULE IX. 
 
 The verb To he through all its variations has the same 
 
 case after it as before it ; as, ",/ am he ;" " Idleness is the 
 
 parent of many vices ;" '* We at first took itio be Ae*'." 
 
 Note 1. — When the verb to be is understood, it has also the same 
 case before and after it ; as, '* He seems the leader of the party ;" 
 that is, " to he the leader," &c. 
 
 Note 2. — Passive verbs, which signify naming, cilling, &c., and 
 certain neuter verbs, have the same case before and after them ; as, 
 " He was called Camr ;" " Slie was named il/rtry ;" " The general 
 was saluted empcrur;" Homer is styled tlie prince of poets i" " He 
 became my friend." 
 
 EXERCISE — For Correction. 
 You may be afraid, it is him indeed. Be composed, 
 it is me. I would act the same part if I were him. He 
 so much resembled my brother that at first sight I took it 
 to be he. After all tlieir professions can it be them 1 If 
 it were not him, who do you imagine it to have been ? 
 Whom do you think he to be ? 
 
 RULE X. 
 
 Nouns, which signify the same thing, are put 6y 
 apposition in the same case ; as, '• Johnson, the Senator, 
 has arrived ;" " Cicero, the orator ;'' " I consulted Wil- 
 liams, the lawjjer."" 
 
 Note 1. — Nouns, which are placed by apposition in the same case, 
 always agree in number and person ; as, " I, Paul the Apostle, write 
 to you ;" •* We, the representatives of the people." 
 
 Note 2. — Nouns are frequently put in apposition to pronouns, and 
 sometimes to sentences, or parts of a sentence ; as, '' /, the president 
 of the association." "Can matter exist and not exist at the same 
 time 1 an absurdity too gross to be confuted." 
 
 Note 3. — When an address is made, the person or thing addressc^^d 
 is the nominative in apposition to thou, ye,, or you, generally under- 
 stood ; as, " John, assist me," that is, " thou jfohn ;" " Gcntlemeu. 
 of the jury ;" " j/c or you gentlemen." 
 
 Me-, 
 
 •-*• 
 
64< 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 ■»' 
 
 .ill 
 
 1 
 
 ■ "■' • y 
 
 ■ i 
 
 ^1 ..: 
 
 ^f'^^'l 
 
 A'^o/e 4. — Nouns, used to describe other nouns, stand iri apposition 
 *o the nouns tlicy describe ; as, "John Hickman, o( Baltimore city, 
 sold the booli ;" " Williain Henry Harrison was president." 
 
 Observation. — Nouns in apposition appear to be thus situated 
 merely for the sake of brevity ; the interposition of the relative and 
 the verb, will generally break the construction : as, "George I. king 
 of Great Britain ;" that is, " Ger^rgc I, iclio teas king," &c. ; " Cicero, 
 ivho is styled the orator. The words king and orator in the latter 
 sentences, are in the nominative case, according to Rule IX. 
 
 EXERCISE — Fo7' Correction. 
 
 1. Johnson, tlie senators, will propose the ineasiire. I, 
 James the first, kings of England. I sent it to yc, the 
 printer. Taylor, the generals of the army, sends this or- 
 der to Hamilton, the commanders of the fort. I, Ca3sar, 
 the consuls, issue the proclamation. We, the representa- 
 tive of the people in congress assembled, assimie the re- 
 sponsibility that may follow from tliis measure. 
 
 RULE xr. 
 
 Pronouns must always agree with their antecedents, 
 and nouns for which they stand, in gender and number; 
 as, " This is the friend ivJiom I love ," " That is the vice 
 tvhich I hate j" " The king and the queen have put on 
 their robes. 
 
 The relative is of the same person as the antecedent, 
 and the verb agrees with it accordingly ; as, " Thou who 
 lorest wisdom ,•" " I who speak from experience." 
 
 Note 1. — Personal pronoinis, being used to supply the place of the 
 noun, are not employed in flie same part of a sentence as the noun 
 wliich they represent ; as, '•' The king, he is just ;" " I saw her tlie 
 queen ;" it should be, " Tlie king is just ;" " I saw the queen." 
 
 Note 2. — The pronoun that is frequently applied to persons, as 
 well as to 11iini;s, l)u1, after an adjective in the superlative degree, 
 and the word same, it is generally used in preference to toho or which ; 
 as ; " Catiline's .'ollowers were the most prolligate that could be 
 found in any city;"' '•' He is the same man that I saw before." There 
 are cases in whieh we cannot conveniently dispense with this relative ; 
 First; after irho. nhcn used as an interrogative j as, "Who, that 
 has any sense of religion, would have argued thus ?" Sc€ondly ; 
 When persons make up a part of the antecedent ; as, " The woman, 
 and the estafe, that became his fortune, were too much for his 
 consideration." 
 
 Note 3. — The pronouns whichxoever and whosoever, &c. are 
 elegantly divided by the interposition of the corresponding noun ; as, 
 " On which side soever he cast his eyes." 
 
 as. 
 
 as, 
 
 (( 
 
 languf 
 
 noun 
 
 I." 
 
 say; 
 
 neuter 
 
 subjec 
 
 day;' 
 
 tion 
 
 theth 
 
 sidere 
 
 " Tht 
 
 in the 
 
 of it 
 
 inutal 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 65 
 
 antecedents, 
 
 10 much for his 
 
 iVb/c 4. — The objective case of the personal pronouns is often im- 
 properly put for tkc&c and Iho&e. : as, '' Give me them books ;" instead 
 of*' those books." The nominative case, howevf'r, is generally used 
 ill the preference to those ; as, " 27ic?/ who weep ;" instead of" Those 
 who weep." 
 
 Note 5. — The word ichat is sometimes improperly used for that ; 
 as, " They will not believe, but what I have been entirely to blame." 
 
 Note 6. — The pronoun relative who should be confined to the prop- 
 crnames of persons, or to the general terms of men, women, &c., 
 except when a term directly implies persons. The following ex- 
 amples arc therefore incorrect ; " The faction tuho ; France who ; 
 the court who;" which should be used. 
 
 Note 7. — The application of the relative «'//o fo very young children 
 seems to carry with it a harshness ; as, '" The child «."/;o." It is still 
 more improperly applied to animals ; as, '*' The fowl ichom nature 
 has taught." 
 
 Note 8. — When the name of a person is U3cd merely as a name, 
 and does not refer to the person, the relative who ought not to bo 
 applied; as, " It is no wonder if such a man did not shine at court ; 
 who w^as but unolher name for prudence and economy." Better thus, 
 "whose name was," &.c. 
 
 Noted. — The interjections O! Oh! and .^// .' require the objec- 
 tive cases of a pronoun in the first person after tlicm ; as, " O me ! 
 Oh me ! Ah me I" but the nominative case of the second person ; 
 as, " O thou persecutor ! Oh ye hypocrites !" 
 
 Note 10. — It is and it icon are often used in a plural construction; 
 as, " Jt is a few gi'eat men who decide." '* // urts the heretics 
 that first began to rail." 
 
 Observation. — Every relative ought to have an antecedent to 
 which it refers, expressed or implied ; as, " who is fatal to (tthcrs, is 
 so to himseil;" that is, ''the man who."" The relative sometimes 
 refers to a whole or part of a sentence; as, " The resolution was 
 offered and adopted ivithout due consideration, ichich produced great 
 dissatisfaction." 
 
 The neuter pronoun, it by an idiom peculiar to the English 
 language is frcqutiilly joined in the oxpluuatory sentence with a 
 noun or pronoun of tin; masculine or feminine gender ; as, " It was 
 I." " // was ii man or woman." It is often omitteil ; thus we 
 say ; " As appears ; as follows :" for " As it appears;" &c. The 
 neuter proiioim it is sometimes employed to express; First; the 
 subjectofadiseuur.se or inquiry; as, " It happened on a summer's 
 day;" " Who is .7 that calls me 1" Sccuvd ; the state or condi- 
 tion of any p(;rson or thing ; as, " How is it with you ?" Third ; 
 the thing that is the cause of any efh et or event, or any person con- 
 sidered merely as the cause ; as, " A\e heard hpr say it was not he." 
 " The truth is, it was I that sent the note."' (Ja e f^hould be taken 
 in the position of the relative Hint no i inbii^nity ni; y arise in the use 
 of it ; as, .vhen we say, " The disciples of (/'hrisl whom wc- 
 imitate ;" \\ e may mean the imiuition of CI, rist or ol his disciples 
 
 
 -ir r 
 
 v» 
 
66 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 '^ 
 
 %■■■ 
 
 'I 
 
 EXERCISE — For Corrcciion. 
 
 They, which seek wisdom, will certainly find her. The 
 male among birds seem to discover no beauty but in the 
 colour of its species. Rebecca took goodly raiment which 
 were with her in the house and put them upon Jacob. 
 The wheel killed another man, which is the sixth which 
 lost their lives by this means. The fair sex, whose task 
 is not to mingle in the labours of public life, has its own 
 part to act. 
 
 1 do not think that any one should incur censure for 
 being careful of their reputation. Thou, who has been 
 a witness of the fact, can give an account of it. The 
 miml of man cannot be long without some food to 
 nourish the activity of his thoughts. The exercise of 
 reason appears as little in these sportsmen as in the beasts 
 whom they hunt, and by whom they are sometimes hunted. 
 
 1. Whoever entertains such an opinion, he judges 
 eiToneously. The cares of this world, they often choko 
 the growth of virtue. Disappointments and alllictions, 
 they often improve us. 
 
 2. Moses was the meekest man whom we read of in 
 the Old Testament. Humility is one of the most amia- 
 ble virtues which we can possess. They arc the same 
 persons who assisted us yesterday. 
 
 3. Howsoever beautiful they appear, they have no 
 real merit. On whichsoever side they are contemplated, 
 
 4). Which of them two persons has most distinguished 
 himself. None suller injuries more impatiently than 
 those that are most forwiinl in committing them, 
 
 5. He would not be persuaded but what I was in 
 fault. 
 
 6. [le instructed and fed the crowds who surrounded 
 him. The courts, who gives currency to manners, ought 
 to be exemplary. He was the ablest minister which 
 James possessed. I am happy in the friend which I 
 have long proved. 
 
 7. The ciiild whom you have just seen. He is 'ike a 
 beast of |)rey who destroys without pity. 
 
 8. Having once di^gusted him, he could never regain 
 llie favour of Nero, who was another name of cruelty. 
 Flattery, whose nature is to deceive, sliould bo avoided,. 
 
I her. The 
 but in tbo 
 ent which 
 on Jacob, 
 xth which 
 v'hose task 
 IS its own 
 
 ensure for 
 ) has been 
 fit. The 
 le food to 
 xercise of 
 the beasts 
 les hunted, 
 he judges 
 ften choko 
 allhclions, 
 
 read of in 
 
 nost amia- 
 
 thc same 
 
 ' liave no 
 ilemplated. 
 stinguished 
 3ntly tlian 
 11. 
 I was in 
 
 surrounded 
 Iters, ought 
 iter which 
 d which I 
 
 [e is 'ike a 
 
 jver regain 
 
 of cruelty* 
 
 avoided*. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 67 
 
 9. Ah ? unhappy thou. Oh ! happy we, surrounded 
 by 80 many blessings. 
 
 10. It is remarkable his continual endeavours to serve 
 us after our ingratitude towards him. 
 
 RULE XU. 
 
 The relative is the nominative case to the verb, when 
 no nominative comes between it and the verb ; as, " The 
 master wlio taught us." " Tlic trees lohich were planted." 
 
 When a nominative comes between the relative and 
 the verb, the relative is governed by some word in its own 
 member of the sentence ; as, " He, who preserves me, to 
 wlima I owe my being, and ivhom I serve, is eternal." 
 
 ^ole. — When a question is asked, the noun or pronoun, containing 
 the answer, must bo in the same case as that >vhich conlaiiia the quet>- 
 Uon; as, " Whose hooks arc these'?" "They are Jo/i/i's." ''Of 
 whom did he buy them i"' Of the bookseller." 
 
 Observation. — When tlic antecedent and relative both become 
 nominatives, each to different verbs, the relative is nominative to the 
 former, and the antecedent to the latter verb ; as, " True Philosophy 
 uhick is tiie ornament of our nature, consists in tlic love of our duty." 
 
 Exr.RCiSE — jfor Correction, 
 
 We arc dependent on each other's assistance ; whom 
 can subsist by himself? If he will not hear his l)est 
 friend, whom will be sent to admonish him ? The per- 
 Bons, who conscience and virtue support, may smile at tho 
 caprices of fortune. That is the student, to who I gavo 
 the book, and whom, I am persuaded, deserved it. Who 
 was the money paid to ?• 
 
 RULE xiir. 
 
 When the relative is preceded by two nominatives of 
 
 different jiersons, the relative and the verb may agree in 
 
 persoi. with either according to the sense ; as, '* I am the 
 
 man who command you j" or, I am the man who oom- 
 
 fnaads you ;" 
 
 Obterwatioiu — When the relative and the verb have been deter- 
 mined to a^rcc with either of tlie preceding nominatives, that agree- 
 ment must be preserved thriiii;<;hout the sentenco ; as, "1 am th« 
 Lord, who vmlitth all things and stre.tcheih forth tlic ticavcns," Sic. 
 
 EXERCISE — Fnr Correction. 
 
 I am the teacher, who adopt that sentiment, and niain- 
 
 (ainii tliC propriety of sucli lucasurcu. Thou art the man. 
 
 4 
 •.-'? 
 
68 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 who hast often relieved me, and who lias not doscrtcci mo 
 in the liour ofneed. 1 am the man who approves, and 
 recommend the measure. 
 
 RULE XIV. 
 
 ' A collective noun, or a noun of multitude, may have a 
 verb or pronoun nLn-eeint!; with it eitlier in the singular or 
 plural numhor, accordiiiii; to the unity or plurality of the 
 idea which it conveys j as, '* The meetina 2ms large ;" 
 '< The conunitloe irrre divided in their opinions ;" ** 'i'he 
 nation is pourrlul ;'' " JMy people tlo not consider, tJicy 
 have not known me." 
 
 Exr.nciSK — For Correction. 
 The people rejoices in that which should give it sorrow. 
 The Hock, and not the fleece, are the oi)jecls of the shep- 
 herd's care. The crowd were great. Tiie British parlia- 
 ment are composed of a kintrorcjueen, lords, and commons. 
 When a inlion complain, the rulers shouKJ listen to their 
 voice. VVhy do this geneiatlon look for greater evidence? 
 
 RULE XV. 
 
 Conjunctions connect the same moods and tenses of 
 
 verbs, and cases of nouns and pronouns ; as, " Candour 
 
 is to be ajiprored and jirtietisei/ :^' *' I re.^-pei'f and revcra 
 
 the man ;" "Jf»/,M and Fri/ncis were school-lt'llows." 
 
 xV*/c.— -CDiijuiK'tions arc somctiiiu' miido to roiiticct ditTcrcnt mooda 
 and t(;ii.ics of vf.'rl)s, Iml in tlioso inslaiicr.o llu; noiiiiiiiilivc shnuld bo 
 generally reiitatcd ; as, " lie is dniii^croii^'y ill, but lie may rccuver." 
 
 E\ rucisE — For ( 'orrcetlon. 
 Professing reiiard, and to act diflorcntly. discover a base 
 mind. My brother and hiui are well. You and us en- 
 joy 'many privllcL'cs. Sh(^ and him are very ujdiappily 
 connected. To be moderate in our views, and proceed- 
 ing moderately in the piu'suit of tlieni, is the best way to 
 ensure success, l»etwi'en I and him there is some dis- 
 parity of years. 
 
 RULE XVI. 
 
 Somcconjunciions require the indicative, and othersthe 
 subjunctive mood afiop them. It is a general rule that, 
 when any thiuL' contingent or doubtful is inipliudjtbe snb- 
 junclivesiioiiI(lb(Mis('d; as," //'I ?r< /v; to unlc, lie would 
 not regard it}" " IJu will not be pardoned unh;:s ho 
 repent.'* 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 69 
 
 m 
 
 }scrtcd mc 
 roves, and 
 
 lay have a 
 singulnr or 
 ality of tho 
 ms large ;" 
 ' <*'i'he 
 isider, tJwT/ 
 
 e it sorrow. 
 Dfllie shep- 
 itisli parlia- 
 l commons, 
 ten to their 
 r evidence? 
 
 d tcns«:'s of 
 " Candour 
 f and rcvero 
 •Hows." 
 
 lifTcrcnt moods 
 itivc slioulil bo 
 may recover.** 
 
 :ovcr a base 
 and lis en- 
 ' mdiappily 
 lid procecd- 
 l)csl way to 
 s some dis- 
 
 1(1 othersthe 
 1 1 rule that, 
 ud, tlie biil)- 
 *, ho would 
 I nuhvs lie 
 
 Conjunctions, that are of a positive andabsolute nature, 
 
 require the indicative mood ; " As virtue advances, 50 
 
 vice recedes," " He is healtiiy, hecauso he is temperate.'' 
 
 Notel. — The cnnjuiictinns if, thous;h, unices, except, whether. 
 Sec, generally require the subjunctive mo(xl iii'ler them ; also lest aud 
 ihut, when annexed to a cunnnand ,* as, " Love not sleep, lest tliou 
 come to poverty ;" " Take heed that thou speak not to Jacob." 
 
 Note 2. — Bolli the indicativi! and subjunctive are somellnics im- 
 pioperly put afler the siimc conjunction in llie same sentence, and 
 under similar circiimstanccs; as, " IfWvrelte hut one body of hgis- 
 Litors, it is no iH'llcr tlian a tyranny ; (/'there arc two, there will be 
 acastuig voice ;" it should be, " if there be two," &.c. 
 
 Xutc 3. — An ellipsis in the conjunctive form of speech often creates 
 irregularities in construction of sentences ; as, " We shall overtake 
 iiiia though he run ;" that is, '•' though he lihould m/;i." 
 
 Nutc 1. — The auxiliary have in th(! perfect tense of the subjunctive 
 mood is soinetinifs improperly used instead {>{' hast and has ; as, "If 
 liiiiu /((U'C di'tcrmined, we nm.st subnul ;" "Unless he have consent- 
 ed ;" it should be, " hiisl iletennined ; lias CDnscated."' 
 
 Note J. — The auxiliaries had, shall, and will, arc sometimes im- 
 properly usetl in the ]ilui)erft'ct and future tenses iX tiie suiijiuicti>e 
 mood, instead ol' hailst, shult, iiwd wilt ; as, " If thou /iOfi applieil 
 tliysell';" '' Unless thou *//(«// speak the truth;'' '* If thou will under- 
 take the business." 
 
 Nate (!. — The auxiliaries of the potential mood, when npplicd to 
 the subjunctive, do njt change the terminatic/n of the second person 
 siiigidar. We properly say ; '• If thou mayst or canst go ;" " Though 
 tliou ?/jji,''///.sMiV(',"' iie. hut the second person singular of the im- 
 jierfect tense in the' subjunctive is sometimes inipro^jrly used ; as, 
 " If thou loved him truly." '"' Tliou-jh thou ilidan\i\)rnu" Tlie verbs 
 should be lovedsl and itidst/'' 
 
 Note 7. — Some conjunctions haye rorresponding conjunctions 
 belonging to them, either expressed or understood; uj, 
 
 1. Tho\n;k — yet, itei\rthclvss, '" Though he was rich, yrf he be- 
 came poor." 
 
 2. Wluthir — or ; a-*, *' Whether he will 0/* not, I cannot tell." 
 
 II. Ncillnr-~nin' ; as, '* Keithi r he nor I am in fault." 
 
 •1. .>^s" — as, and <(s'— S" ; expre?<!»ing a comparison of e(|ualily ; as, 
 '' Slie is ((.s- uiniible as her sister."' " ./Js the stars, no shall thy seed 
 be." 
 
 0. .7s — so, and so — as ; expressing a comparison of (piality ; as, 
 " Js one tlicth, Ml dieth the other." " To see thy glory .so us I lu\c 
 
 4 
 
 seen. 
 
 &c. 
 
 7. So— as ; with a negativi- and adjective, e\|»ressing a rnijipnri- 
 son of (piality ; as, *' I'onipe) uas nut so griat a geiiluinan (i$ 
 Ca>sar.*' 
 
 N.^.V,< — lha> ; expressing a conseipience ; as, ''lle'was^^o 
 falijjutd that he could scarcely inuvt." 
 
70 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Observation. — Contii,geiicy nwd futurity both concur in the prci)er 
 use ol' the subjuncUve n.uud ; thercrore, Avhenever conlingeiicy unj 
 I'uturity are not cxprtisscil, it is not proper to turn tlie verb IVoni its sig- 
 nilicutioa of present time, or to vary its form or termination. If the 
 person or thing, wliich forms the subject of discourse, is represented in 
 a certain slate or condition, or in the act of performing soma action 
 ut tlie present time, the verb sliould be in tiie indicativu mood, 
 although preceded by a conjunction implying contingency j as, 
 " Thuui^h he is sirk, lie may recover." " If lie thinks as he Bpeaks, 
 ho may be trusted." In the above examples contingency is express- 
 ed witiiout futurity ; in the following contingency and futurity are 
 both implied, and the use of the subjunctive is proper ; as, " He will 
 not b': pardoned unless he repent'^' "If thou iwj'u re another, thou 
 ■vvilt injure thyself." If, with but following it, when futurity is de- 
 noted, requires the subjunctive mood; as, *■ If he do but touch the 
 hills, tiiey shall smoke." Tne particle as after the words suc/i and 
 tnany has the I'orce of a relative pronoun ; as, *' Lcl«uc/t usprcsuiue." 
 *• vc/s many as were ordained." 
 
 EXERCISE — For Correction. 
 
 ir he ac(juires ticlies, they will corrupt his iniiid. 
 Tliough lie urges me yet more eaniestly, I shall Jiot com- 
 ply ufilesd he atlvaiices more loivihle reasons. 1 shall 
 walk ill the lieUls today unless it rains. As the teacher 
 were present, the pupils behaved properly. She disap- 
 proved the ineasinv, heeause it were very improper. 
 Though he be her iViend, he does not attempt to justify 
 her conduct, 
 
 1. I will submit if he convinces me of my error. Un- 
 less I am present, he will not succeed. It' Ji»hn was to 
 accompany nie, 1 would feel sale. Despise no condition 
 of lile, lest it happens to he yom- own. Let him, that is 
 sanguine, take heed lest he miscarries. Take care thai 
 thou brcakest not the rules. If he does but intimate his 
 desire, it will be sutlicient. 
 
 •J. If one man [)relor a life of industry, it is becauao 
 he has an iilea of comfort in wealth; if another prefers 
 a life of gaiety, it is from a like idea concerning pleasure. 
 IS'o man engages in that business urdess he aim at repu- 
 tation, or hopes for some advantage. 
 
 3. Unless he karns faster, he will be no scholar. 
 Though he falls, he shall not be ulti'rly cast down. On 
 condition that he comes, I will consent to stay. Till it>- 
 peniance composes his mind, he will be a stranger to 
 peace. Though virtue ajtpear severe, she is truly amia- 
 
' in the prq)er 
 lingeiicy und 
 
 fVuiii its sig- 
 Ltioii. If tite 
 eprescnled ia 
 
 »oiiitt action 
 ciitivu luood, 
 iigency; us, 
 ati tic epeaks, 
 •y is exprcss- 
 
 futuriiy arc 
 as, "• lie will 
 another, thou 
 futurity is dc- 
 bnt touch tlio 
 urds such and 
 usprcsuuic." 
 
 L his iiiinJ. 
 
 ill jiot com- 
 
 iis. 1 shull 
 the teacher 
 She disap- 
 
 r improper. 
 
 ipl to jujilify 
 
 error. Un- 
 ohn was to 
 MO coialitiou 
 him, that is 
 Ivo care that 
 intimate ins 
 
 is bee a 1180 
 )ther prefers 
 ii;; pleasure, 
 lim at repu- 
 
 no scholar, 
 down. Oil 
 y. Till ro- 
 stra 11 ger to 
 truly uiiiiu- 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 71 
 
 ble. Unless the account deceive me, my estate is con- 
 siderably improved. Though the ascent to the temple of 
 virture apjiears craggy, be not discouraged. 
 
 ■i. It' thou luive promised, be faithful to thy engage- 
 ments. Tiiough he have proved his right, he will not 
 exact it. Utdess lie liave improved, he is unfit for tlio 
 oflice. 
 
 5. Unless thou shall see the propriety of the measure, 
 we shall not desire thy support. Though thou will not 
 acknowledge it, thou canst not deny the fact. If thou 
 had succeeded in tlu^ nicasiu'e. 
 
 t). If thou may share the labour. Unless thou can 
 support the cause, give it up. Though thou might havo 
 foreseen the danger, thou couldst not have avoided it. 
 If thou could convince him. 
 
 7. Neither hunger or cold could weaken his resolution. 
 He is not as learned as his brother. He was so fatigued 
 as lie could scarcely luove. Charles would not eat it, 
 nor sull'er John to do so. lie is not as eminent and as 
 nmcli esteemed as he thinks. I will present it myself, 
 or direct it to be given to him. I must be so candid to 
 own the fault. Be ready to succour such persons who 
 need assistance. Germany ran the same risk as Italy 
 had. 
 
 RULE XVII. 
 
 Every adjective, and every adjective pronoun, belongs 
 to some novm expressed or undor.stood ; as, " He is a 
 ffoodi as well as a wise man." '* Faw are happi/ ;" that 
 is " jH'mons.''^ 
 
 Atljective j)ronoims must agree in nundjer with tl>e 
 nouns to which they relate ; as " 7'A/.v book ;" " thiya 
 books ;" " tliat book j" " thoac books ;" »' another road }" 
 *' other roads." 
 
 N^otc I. — The phrases tliis means and tliot mranx am n»rd only in 
 reference to tlic 8irr;;ular nuiiiltrr, and tlusc mvdnn and those iniuiis, 
 to the plural ; as, " \iy this iiicnns Ihry tscaped.'' " By //<(// iiuuns 
 hu gained iiis point." '' Thr piijiiis nere attentive, indu8triuu», 
 aud ol)cdiehl; and l;y these means they acquired i\no>vledgc." 
 
 Nutc 2. — Wiien two persons or lhinj!;s are spoken of in a sentence, 
 that iTicm to t lie former and tins to liie latter; us, *' liotii wealth 
 and poverty arc tcniplutiuns) thai tends to excite pride, this, dii- 
 coutcnt." 
 
 '4 
 :A 
 
 '.f 
 
 
I 
 
 :i^ 
 
 72 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAH. 
 
 Xote 3. — The tllstribntivo adjective prr.iouiis each, cccnj, ciilur, 
 agree with nouns, pronouns, and vcib.-j, of the singular luimboi 
 only; as, '" Eurlt oi' the worlciiion received his wa^eo." '' Evcnj 
 tree is known by its rruit." " Eilhcr oftlie two is eligible.'' 
 
 Note 4. — \djeclives arc scniidinies iiiiproperly ajiplicd as adverbs ; 
 as, ''•' //i(^'//t'ri'JU honest ; cxcelloit well,'" &e. : lor ^^ Indifferent I ij 
 honest; excellent Itj ^yK^\',''- and adverbs again arc often Jiii[)ropcriy 
 used for adjectives ; as, "' Tlie tutor addressed him in terms ratl.ei- 
 warm, but suitabbj to iiis (.ii'euce ;•' " suitable.'' 
 
 Xotc 5. — Double conijiaratives and superlatives should be avoid- 
 ed ; '•as, A worscr conduct;"' "A mure surciicr temper," " '1 he 
 must strictest ticct ;'■ it sliould be, '' irursc conduct; more serene ; 
 strictest ;"' ik.c. 
 
 Note {]. — In some casos the adjective thculd not be separated 
 from Iho noun f;) wh eh it belongs ; as, ''•' A large cnougii nuinber ;"' 
 it should l)e, "'A lujinljer large euouih." 
 
 Kote 7. — The adjective in Knglish is usually placed before tlr; 
 noun; as, '• A yt/d /■,;(;> man;'" but it is sometimes put after ti.e 
 ncun : 
 
 1. When something depends upni ihc adjective, or when it gives 
 abetter bomid ; as, •' A man i,e(Hi\;us to iiis ciiemies ;" '"A tree 
 three feet ////e/,-."' 
 
 2, \Mi.;n 1l;e adjective is en.phatical ; as, '''Alexander the 
 Great ;■' " Louis the BoliL'' 
 
 '.L \\'hen several adieetives belong to the same noun ; 
 
 as. 
 
 A 
 
 man J!<s/, icisi . and citiirituhlc,"' 
 
 4. W hen the verb /<> l)e, in any of its ferms, conies between a 
 noun antl an ailj.cli\t', t'ne ailjettnc; nuiy eillu r precede or foUov/ 
 the ncun ; " The man is /((/;)/*;/, or luiiipy is the nuin, who lives 
 virtuously.'' 
 
 0. When the adjective is preced<d by an adverb/, cr expresses 
 some circumstance cl' a noun placed after an active verb; as, "A 
 boy reguhuly yttuliotts.'' "" \anity olten rentiers its pcssessor 
 despicJAc."' 
 
 Observdt: n. — Adjective pronouns in the plural number will 
 sometimes pro|>crly associate with a singe.lar ncun ; as, " Our desire 
 is tliat you acei pt llie faveur.'' " We received their resignation."' 
 The adjective nutnij, uitii the indefinite article (( nf'er it, is seine- 
 times used v.itli a nam in the singular inimber; us, ^^ Many a 
 gem.'' " iV(ni(/ a llowcr," kc. These phrases refer to J/KWfJ/ i,'emji 
 and many Jh>u\rs considered separately and not collectively. 
 
 F.XKUCisi: — For Con'cdion. 
 
 These kind of iinUiIiicncos soften and iiijufc the mind. 
 Instetid (d" iinvifuvi!'!!; vonrsclves vou iiuvc been pltivinu 
 this tv\() hours. Those soil ol" lavoiir.s ihd iv:d injury. 
 Tliu hoard is liiive loot hrt^ad. IIow ninny .sorrows 
 sliould we nvoid, il'ue were not iiidnf^iioiiij to make it. 
 
 1. Cha 
 
 noor. H 
 the mean 
 
 2. Keli 
 him bene: 
 pitiable s 
 prospect 1 
 
 3. Kac 
 whicli thi 
 llieir static 
 ligion. 1 
 lilb. Nt 
 opinions ; 
 
 4. She 
 i-ate. H( 
 near exiit 
 may reasi 
 came a;j:i 
 :iii:tal)!e 
 uxcellent 
 rite stud; 
 ttialit)!!. 
 
 5. Iti:^ 
 
 lain oiu?. 
 the {irove 
 iS iiiore 1. 
 ;s the nic 
 G. Ho 
 1V llic \v 
 :;loves ; 1 
 the row j 
 
 1 wo n 
 an ullirm 
 
 <vd ;" ih 
 aothlmj; 
 
 Neithc 
 
 liiings, I'c 
 'annot b 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 73 
 
 Aloxamlor tho 
 
 noun ; ;is, " A 
 
 1. Cliarles was extravagant, antl by this mean became 
 poor. He obtained liis eml by that mean. Industry is 
 the mean of detaining competency. 
 
 2. Keligion rait>es5 man above liimself ; irreligion sinks 
 him beneath the brutes ; tliat binds him down to a poor 
 pitiable speck of perishable earth; this opens for him a 
 
 prospe 
 
 ct to the skies. 
 
 3. Each of them in their turn receive the benefits to 
 which they are entitled. Every person, whatever be 
 ihoir station, are liound by tiie duties of morality and re- 
 liirion. Every leaf, and every drop of water, teem with 
 lite. Neither of those men liave an idea that their 
 opinions arc ill-fouiuled. On either sides of the river. 
 
 4. She reads proper, writes neat, and conij)oses accu- 
 rate, lie was exii'eme prodigal, and his properly is now 
 near exhausted. They live coniormable to the rules. VVc 
 inay reason very clear. lie was exceeding beloved. He 
 came agreeable to iiis promise, and conducted himself 
 :3ii":tal)!e to the occasion, lie speaks fluent, and reads 
 uxcellcnt. lie lived agreeable to the dictates of reason. 
 The study of Syntax should bo previously to thatof punc- 
 ;iiaru)n. They were left solitarily and distressed. 
 
 5. It is more easier to build two chinmies than to main- 
 lain one. The nitihtinjiale has the most sweetest voice in 
 tlie grove. That is the elegantest tree on the farm. She 
 iS more beautit'uler than her sii>ter. The Suj)remc Eeing 
 s the HU)st wisest and nmst best of beings. 
 
 6. lie spoke in a distinct enough manner to 1)0 licard 
 w the whole assembly. Thomas received a new pair of 
 :loves ; he li\c's with a old rich man. Tiic two fust in 
 ihc row are cherry-trees, the two others are pear-trees. 
 
 RALK XVIir. 
 
 Two negatives in the same sentence are C(juivalent to 
 an allirmative ; a.--, "ilis laiiguago was not mKjrmamati'' 
 nl ;" tliat is, " it was 'jmniniaticaiy " He need not do 
 nothhuj; that is, " he should do somdhbuj.''^ 
 
 EXERCISE — For Co r red ion. 
 
 Neither riches, nor honours, nor no such perishable 
 ihings, can satisfy the desires of an inunortal spirit. There, 
 •annot be nothing more Insignificant than vanity. They 
 
 1- 
 
 
74 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ■ ^ ■ '• 
 
 'i-'i 
 
 tVid not receive no letter. I am resolved not to comply 
 with no proposals they may ofler. Nor did they not 
 perceive him. 
 
 RULE XIX. 
 
 The indefinite article agrees with nouns in the singular 
 mimher only, individually or collectively ; as, " A Chris- 
 tian ;" " An infidel ;" " A score ;" " A thousand." 
 
 The definite article may agree with nouns either in the 
 
 singular or plural number j as, " The garden ;" " the 
 
 house ;" " t?io stars." 
 
 Note\. — The articlt'9 are often properly omitted; whfn used 
 they should be justly applied according to their distinct nature ; as, 
 •* Charity is a Tirtue." " Tlie sea is green." " .j1 lion is bold." 
 
 Note 2. — It may in general be sulTicierit to prefix the article to the 
 former of two words in the same sentence, uulcss for tlie sake of 
 emphasis ; as, " He sold the hou?e and farm." " It was for the 
 benefit of the widow and the orphans. 
 
 Observation. — A nice distinction of the r ise is sometimes made 
 by the use or omission of the article n ; If say, " He behaved with 
 a little reverence ;" the meaning is positive ; but if I say, " He be- 
 haved with little reverence ;" the moaning- is negative. In common 
 conversation or in familiar style, we frequently omit tlie articles 
 which might be inserted in writing, especially a grave style ; as, 
 "At %vorst, time might be gained by this expedient." "At the 
 worst." Give me here John Baptist's head." " John the Baptist's.'" 
 
 EXF.RCiSE — For Correction. 
 
 A Christian countries. An enemies in the field. A 
 brothers of my uncle. A j^artncrs of my father. A 
 virtuou!* boys. 
 
 1. The fire, the air, tlie earth, and the water are ftiur 
 elements of the philosophers. The reason was given to 
 man to control his passicins. A man is the noblest work 
 of the creation. Wisest and best men sometimes com- 
 mit errors. King conferred on him the title of the duke. 
 
 2. He bought tiie house and the g;irden. He paid for 
 the hat and the coat. The fc;u' of shame and »lesire of 
 approbation prevent mnny bnd actions. He was influenc- 
 ed by a just and generous p"inciple. 
 
 RULE XX. 
 
 Tn the use of words and phr ises, which if: point of time 
 relate to each oilier, a du.^ iv^nid to that rc!ati(Hi should 
 be observed I as, " Tho L'>rd hith [/'ncii, and the Lord 
 
SYNTAX 
 
 ID 
 
 '.'*!)■ 
 
 Itath taken away ;" it should be, " Tlie Lord gave and the 
 Lord hath taken away," 
 
 Note 1 . — Verbs that express Jesire, liope, intention, or command, 
 must invariably be followed by the present, and not tlic perfect of the 
 infinitive mood ; as, " It is now a long time since I commanded him 
 to have done it ;" it should be, " to do it." 
 
 Observation. — When the action or event, signified by the verb in 
 the infinitive mood, is tontemporanj or future with respect to the 
 verb to which it i" chiefly related, the present of the infinitive should 
 be used ; as, " Last week 1 intended to write ;" but, when the ac- 
 tion or event is neither contemporary nor future, the perfect infinitive 
 should be employed ; as, " It would have atibrded me great, pleas ire, 
 as often as I reflected upon it, to liavcbeen the messenger of such in- 
 telligence." If the thing asserted be at all times immutably the same, 
 or supposed to be so, the present tense must be used ; as, " \'irtue is 
 commendable at any season of life." But, if a declaration be made 
 relative to something that is not always the same, or supposed to be 
 so, the past tense should be applied ; as, " The judge said he that 
 xcas in favour of the measure." 
 
 It is not easy to give particular rules for the management of the 
 moods and tenses of verbs with respect to one another, so that they 
 may be proper and consistent. The best rule that can be given is this 
 ▼ery general one ; " To observe what the sense necessarily requires." 
 
 EXERCISE — For Ciyrrcnfion. 
 
 The next new year's day I shall ho at fcIiooI xhrcc 
 vears. He, that was dead, snt up and hcrrsxn to speak. 
 i should be obliged to him if he will gratify ine in that 
 particular. I have compassion on the multitude because 
 they continue with me now three days. Jolin will earn his 
 wages when his service is completed. I?e tliat ns it will, 
 he cannot justify his conduct. After we visited London, 
 we returned to our peaceful home. I have been at Lon- 
 don a 5'ear, and seen tiie king last summer. 
 
 1. I pro])ose to go to York in a few months, and, after 
 I shall finish my business there, toprocced to America. From 
 the little conversation I had with him, he appeared to have 
 i)een a man of letters. I always intended to have reward- 
 ed my son accordinij; to his nu'rits. We done no more 
 than it was our duty t(» iiave done. TiiO'^e proscriptions 
 fKX^m to be the most inicpiltous measures pursued at that 
 time. 
 
 KUI.E XXI. 
 
 ' Wheti the qualities of diniveM' ihlnL'^ are compnn'd, 
 the latter noun or pronoun agrees witii the verb, or is 
 
 4. 
 
 
 a'' 
 
 •i: 
 
 Hi 
 
16 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 jroverned by tlie verb or preposition expressed or uniler- 
 r-itood as, " Thou art wiser than I ;" that is, " than I am." 
 *' They love him more than me ;" that is, " more than 
 they love me." 
 
 Observation. — The relative «7/o seems to form an exception to this 
 rule : it sometimes follows tliati in the objective case ; as. " Alfred than 
 whom a greater king never reigned." The phrase tlutn uhom is, 
 however, avoided by the best modern writers . The above sentence 
 might bo rendered much better by changing it in the follovving man- 
 ner ; '• A greater king tiian Alfred never reigned.'* 
 
 EXERCISE — For Correction. 
 
 They are much greater gainers than me. The under- 
 taking was much better executed by liis brotlier than he. 
 In some respects we have had as many advantages as 
 them ; l)ut they liave had a greater privilege tlian us. 
 Thev \\\\o\v how to write as well as him : l)ut he is a bet- 
 ter graniinarian than them. Who wrote this 1 Not me. 
 Who revealed the secrets ? Not him. WHio said so ? Not 
 us. You know the difficulty belter than me. There is 
 but one in fault, and that is me. 
 
 RULE XXII, 
 
 To avoid disagreea])le repetitions, and to express our 
 ideas in lew words, an ellipsis, or omission of some words, 
 is frequently admitted ; as, " He was a learned, wise, and 
 good man ;" instead of, " He "was a learned man, he was 
 a wise man, and he was a good man." 
 
 But, if the omission of words would obscure the sentence, 
 weaken its force, or be attended with any other impro- 
 priety, they must be expressed ; as, " We are apt to love, 
 who love us ;" the word them should be supplied. 
 
 Note. — Every compound sentence is more or less elliptical ; the 
 following examples will show the ellipsis of the difl'erent parts of 
 speech : 
 
 1. Of t!ie article ; as, " A man, woman, and child ;'^ that is, '' A 
 man, a woman, and a child." 
 
 2. Of the noun ; as, '* The laws cf God and man :" that is, " The 
 laws of God and the laws of man." 
 
 3. Of the adjective ; as, " A delightful garden and orchard j" that 
 is, *• A delighlful garden and <t deli'j^htfuL orchard."' 
 
 4. Of 1h(; pronoun ; as, '* I love and respect him ;" that is, " I love 
 him and I respect him." 
 
 5. Of the verb : as, *« The man was old and crafty ;" tlial iS) « TliB 
 man was old and the man was crafty." 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 77 
 
 The auxiliaries do, did, have, had, shall, loill, may, might, &c., 
 rxre frequently used alona to spare the repetition of the verb j as, " He 
 loves intemperance, but I do not ;" that is, " I do not love," &c. 
 '• We succeeded, but he did not ;" that is, he did not succeed," 
 
 6. Of the adverb ; as, " He spoke and acted wisely ;" that is) 
 " He spoke wisely, and acted wisely." 
 
 7 . Of the preposition ; as, " He spoke to every man and woman ;" 
 that is " to every woman." " This day last year," that is, *' on this 
 day in last year." 
 
 8. Of the conjunction ; as, " I confess the power, wisdom, and 
 love of the Creator ;" that is, " the power, and wisdom and love," 
 kc. 
 
 9. Of the interjection ; as, " Oh ! pity and shame !" that is " Oh 
 pity ! Oh shame !" 
 
 Obseitalion. — When the omission of words would obscure the 
 sentence or weaken its furco, tlicy should be supplied ; and on the 
 other hand, when the rcjjctition of the words becomes disagreeable 
 cr tedious, or is altcisdcd with any impropriety, they should be 
 omitted. The repetition of words for the sake of emphasis is often 
 proper ; as, " I liave seen liim, and I have heard him too." In 
 elhptical expressions care sliould be taken that the adjective have 
 exactly the same signiftcalioii, and be quite as proper when joined 
 to the latter noun as to thcfoiinor; otherwise the ellipsis should 
 not be admitted ; as, " A beautiful iicld and trees ;" it should be, 
 ' A beautiful field am\ fine trees." 
 
 EXERCISE — For Correction. 
 
 I gladly shunned who gladly lied from me. What is 
 it men mean by dislributive justice ? His lionour, interest, 
 and religion are all onibarked in this undertaking. The 
 fear of death, nor hope of life, could make him submit to 
 .1 dishonest action. An eloyant house and furniture by 
 ihis event was lost to the ovvner. 
 
 RULE XXIII. 
 
 Adverbs, though they have no government of case, 
 tense, &,c., require an appropriate situation in the sentence; 
 for the most part before adjectives, after ver])S active and 
 neuter, and frequently between the auxiliary and the verb ; 
 as, " He matle a vcri/ sensible discourse ; he spoke 
 forcibhf^ and was attentivelj/ heardby the whole assembly." 
 
 Note 1. — The adverb never generally precedes the verb, or is 
 placed between the auxiliary and the verb ; as, " I never was 
 there." " He was never seen to laugh." Ever is sometimes im- 
 properly used for never ; as, " I seldom or ever see him j" for, " I 
 seldom or never sec him." 
 
 Observatiun. — Some adverbs arc improperly used for nouns and 
 
 1) 
 
 ,1^ 
 
 n 
 
 -n. 
 
78 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ■Im 
 
 relative pronouns; "In 16S7 the company was chartered, since 
 «)/!C?i it began to prosper ;" that is, "Since which time.'^ "They 
 framed a protestation where they repeated all their former claims ;'' 
 that is, "in which," &cc. " It is worth their while;" that is, 
 " their time and pains." 
 
 Tlic adverbs here, there, and where are often improperly applied to 
 verbs signifying motion instead o( hither, thither, ivhither ; as, "He 
 came here hastily." " They rode there ;" " Where are you 
 going V Tluy sIiouUl be ; " He came hither ;" " They rode 
 i hither ;" " Whither avc you going 7" The latter form of expres- 
 sion is nearly obsolete, unless in grave style ; the sentences, " hi 
 arrived here to-day ;" " they went there last week ;" " whei'c wiil 
 you go," &.C. are now used by the best modern writers. 
 
 EXERCis E—For Correction. 
 
 He was pleased not often because he was vain. Wil- 
 liam nobly acted. A\'e may happily live though poor. 
 We may expect reasonably that he will come. It can- 
 not be imppi'lincnt therefore to remonstrate. We alwayh 
 should prefer our duty to our pleasure. It is impossible 
 continually to be at work. These things should be nevei 
 separated. So well educated a boy gives great hopes to 
 his friends. 
 
 1 . They could not persuade him though they were 
 
 never so eloquent. He comes never at a proper time. Ho 
 
 was seen to enter the house never again. 
 
 — a=>l«|®ll«>l«l<=— ■ 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 Prosody consists of two parts : the former teaches tlu' 
 true pronunciation of words, comprising accent, quan- 
 tity, EMPHASIS, PAUSE, and TONE ; and the latter tlu 
 
 laws of VERSIFICATION. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 Accent is the laying of a peculiar stress of tlie voice oii 
 a certain letter or syllal)le in a word, that it may bebettei 
 heard than the rest, as distinguished from them ; as in the 
 word jyrcsihne the stress of the voice mui^t be on the letter 
 u and second syllable aume, which take the accent. 
 
 Note. — Every word in the laiignnge of more than one syllabic 
 has one of them distinguished I'roni the rest by accent. Words oi 
 
ihartered, since 
 imc." " They 
 )rmcr claims ;'' 
 Mle ;" that is, 
 
 )perly applied to 
 ither ; as, "He 
 Where are you 
 '• They rode 
 form of expres- 
 sentences, " ht 
 ;" " where will 
 rs. 
 
 3 vain. Wil- 
 tliough poor, 
 me. It can- 
 Wc always 
 ; is impossible 
 lould he nevei 
 great hopes to 
 
 gh they wert^ 
 bper time. Ho 
 
 it. 
 
 PROSODY, 
 
 79 
 
 ler teaches tlu' 
 
 [;CENT, Q,UAN- 
 
 1 the latter tlu 
 
 of the voice oii 
 t may hebettei 
 lieni ; as in the 
 1)0 on tlie letter 
 e accent. 
 
 than one syllabk 
 :cenl. Words oi 
 
 two syllables have necessarily one of them accented, and but one ; 
 unless for the sake of empiiasis wo sometimes lay an equal stress 
 upon two successive syllables ; as, "Dt-/<Jc^" For the accent of 
 dissyllables no general rule can be given. Trisyllables and poly- 
 syllables generally follow the accent of the word from which they 
 are derived ; as, "Loveliness;" " continency." 
 
 QUANTITY. 
 
 The quantity of a syllable is that time which is 
 occupied in pronouncing it. It is considered as long or 
 short. 
 
 A vowel or syllable is long when the accent is on 
 the vowel which occasions it to be slowly joined in pro- 
 nunciation to the following letter or letters ; as, " Fall, 
 Ijfile, nindd, house, feature." 
 
 A syllable is short when the accent is on the consonant, 
 which occasions the vowel to be quickly joined to the 
 succeeding letter ; as, "an't, bon'net, hun'ger." 
 
 A long syllable requires double the tijue of a short one 
 la pronouncing it ; thus " iMfito and " Note" should be 
 pronounced as slowly again as " Mat" and " Not." 
 
 EMPHASIS. 
 
 By emphasis is meant a stronger aiul fuller soiimi of 
 voice, by which we distinguish some word or woriLs on 
 which we design to lay i)articular stress, and to show how- 
 it affects the rest of the sciiieiice. Sometimes the emphat- 
 ic words must bedistiiiguished by a particular toneof voice 
 ;is well as by a greater stress. 
 
 Questions. — Wiuit is prosody ? What is accent 1 What is quan- 
 lity 1 U'lion is a vowel long 1 Wiien is a syllable short ? What 
 (Iocs a long syllable require .'' What is emphasis 1 
 
 Note. — On the ri;j,lit. nKinagoiiieiil of the empiiasis uciiciul.-: tiir 
 life of proiuuiciiition. If no en'.i)li;it.is bo placed on any words, not 
 only will discourse bo rendered heavy and lifeless, but the meaning 
 often left ambij^uous. If llio omplia.sis bi; placed wrong, we shall 
 pervert and conlbund the meaning wholly. To give a common 
 instance ; such a simple qucslioii as this, '' Do you ride to town to- 
 day V is capable of no fewer than four ditlereiil acceptations ac- 
 cording as the cmplmsii is dill'i leiitly placed on the words. If it be 
 pronounced thus ; •■• Do yvu ride to toivii to-day V the answer may 
 iiuturally lie, "No, we send a servant in our stead.', If thus: 
 " Do you ride to town to-diiy 1" answer, " No, we intend to walk."" 
 '' Do you ride <(> /owu to-day ?■' "'No, we ride into the country." 
 " Do you rido to town to-day /'' " No, biil we shall to-morrow." In 
 like manner in solemn discourse the whole force and beauty of aii 
 expression often depc.id on the c: 'phaVic word. 
 
 % 
 
80 
 
 ENGLISH GRAfllMAR. 
 
 IS M 
 
 PAUSES. 
 
 Pauses or rests in speaking and reading are a total ces- 
 sation of tiie voice during a perceptible, and, in many 
 cases, a measurable space of time. 
 
 TONES. 
 
 Tones are different both from emphasis and pauses, 
 consisting in the modulation of the voice, the notes oi 
 variations of sound which we employ in the expression 
 of our sentiments. 
 
 Note. — Emphasis affects particular words and phrases with a dc- 
 '^ree of tone ur inflection of the voice, but tones, peculiarly so called 
 affect sentences, paragraphs, and sometimes even tlic whole of a dis- 
 course. 
 
 To show the use and necessity of tones, wc need only observe that 
 the mind, in ccmimunicating its ideas, is in a continual state of activ- 
 ity, emotion, or agitation, Irom the different effects which those idea- 
 produce in the speaker. 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 nation is tht 
 
 lumbei 
 
 rrangement of a certnii 
 and variety of syllables according to certain laws. 
 
 Bhynic is the correspondence of the last sound of one 
 verso to the last sound or syllable of another. 
 
 Note. — Poetical Feet. — A certain number of syllables con- 
 nected togetlier form a for)t. They are called /c^/, because it is bj 
 their aiil tliat the voice, as it were, Mt(>ps along through the verse in a 
 measured i'pacc of time. All feet u^vd in poetry consist either ol 
 hvo or three syliahjes ; they are n'ducible to eight kinds; four of 
 two syllables, and four of three. In the following table the straight 
 line over a syllable shows th;it the syllablo is ierig, or accented ; am* 
 •he curve line, ihat tlie syllable is slir/rf, or unaccented. 
 
 DISSYLLABLE. 
 
 A Trochee - ./ ; a»», Hateful. 
 An lanilj >' - ; '* Hotn'iy. 
 A Spondee - - ; '■* Tiile Moon. 
 A Pyrrhic o o ; " On Ihu. 
 
 TRISV'LLABLE. 
 
 A Dactyl - i, .. 
 
 An Amphibrach .. - o 
 
 An Anapest o o - 
 
 A Tribrach .. o u 
 
 as 
 
 Labourer. 
 Delightful. 
 Coiitriivcne. 
 Nunierjible. 
 
 Qitcsfion*. — What is a pauic ? What is a lone 1 What is »trsi 
 t'lcation 1 
 QMCition, — What is rhyme 1 
 
■mi 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 81 
 
 1 What is »trsi 
 
 The Iambic, Trochaic, Dactylic, and Anapestic, 
 lire called the principal feet, as poetical compositions 
 consist chiefly of them ; the other feet, called secondary y 
 are introduced to diversify the numbers, and to improve 
 the verse. English verse may be divided into several 
 species, according to the number of feet or syllables of 
 vvhich it is composed. 
 
 Iambic. — The Iambic verse consists of several kinds. 
 
 I. The first form consists of one Iamb and a shor(. 
 yllable ; as, 
 
 Disdaining, 
 Compliiining. 
 
 '2. The second of two Iambs ; as. 
 
 To me tlu"; rose 
 No longer grows. 
 
 It may sometimes take an additional syllabic. 
 
 3. The third consists of three Iambs ; as, 
 
 In palci'S filr (ir nrar, 
 Or lanKius, or obscure 
 
 4. The fourth consists of tour Iambs ; as, 
 
 And may iit lust my Avt'ary s'lge, 
 Find out ii peaceful hermitage. 
 
 5. The fifth, called the Ileroh measure, consists nf 
 five ; as, 
 
 A heap of dust iiloiic remains (if tiie-c ; 
 'Tis iill thou art, and iill tiiii proud shali be. 
 
 6. The sixth form is called the Alcvandrine moasuri' ; 
 :\s, 
 
 Tor thou iirt but Of diist, be huniblC' and lit: who. 
 
 7. The seventh form consists of seven Tainhs, ^onoi- 
 ally written in two lines j the fust containing four, and 
 ♦he second three feet ; as, 
 
 Wlit-n all Ihv niorcics, O m\' God ! 
 
 My rising ^oiil siirveyw , 
 Triinsporird with ihC' view I'm lost 
 
 In wonder, love, and praise. 
 
 Trochaic. — The Trochaic verse is also of several 
 
 kinds. 
 
 1. The first consists of one Trochee and a loin» 
 
 'yllable j as, 
 
 Tfmullt cease, 
 Sink to peace. 
 
 4 
 
 % l| 
 
 f 
 
S-2 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 h L 
 
 2. The second, of two, and sometimes a long syllable ; 
 
 as, 
 
 On th6 mount&in 
 By li roi'intain. 
 In thr days of old 
 Fables plainly told. 
 
 3. The third, of three, and sometimes an additional lone 
 
 fsyllable j as, 
 
 When our hearts are mourning. 
 HtlsUess mortals tnil for nouLclit, 
 IJUss in vain from tiirth is sought. 
 
 4. The foiirtl), of four Trocliecs ; as, 
 
 Houiul lis roars the temi'est loudCr. 
 
 f). The fifth, of five; but very seldom used ; as, 
 
 All thill walk on loot or ride in chariots, 
 All that dwell in palact's or garrets. 
 
 G. Tiie sixth I'orni con:*ibts of six Trochees; as, 
 
 On ii inouiilain stretched beneath a hoarjT «ill6w. 
 
 Dactylic. — Tliis measure is very uncommon; as, 
 
 From the low jileasiires 6t this fiillen niiture 
 IJlse ye to higher. 
 
 Anapestic Of this measure there are several kinds • 
 
 I. The siioriest form consists of the Anapest; as. 
 
 Bill in vain 
 They conii)laiii. 
 
 This form is nui!iiL''uous ; lor by laying the stress of tht 
 voice on the first ruui third byljahle it Ix'coines a Trochaic; 
 therefore the siiiiplesi form of the Anapestic ver?e con 
 >isl«< of two Annpi'sts; as, 
 
 Bill liis courii'j,e 't;iin fail. 
 For ii(> arts cmilil avail. 
 
 2,, Tiie secoiiil form consists of three; as, 
 
 y^ woods, spn'nd your branches lipacc ; 
 'I'o vnir d( epi'.st recess I ll\ ; 
 
 1 wniiid liidc' Irom the bciists of IhO chase, 
 I wm'tld vani:^h from ever; eye. 
 
 .'?. The thinl species consists of four Annpests ; as, 
 
 May I go. (Til ni\' passioiifl wil!i abifoliitc sway, 
 And grow wiser and better as life wears awiiy. 
 
 POETICAL PAUSES. 
 
 There are two kinds of pauses in poetry, called tht 
 
PUNCTUATION. 
 
 83 
 
 long syllable 
 
 idditional loni' 
 
 [?d ; as, 
 
 its, 
 
 cs ; as, 
 niow. 
 mnioii ; as, 
 
 several kinil? ■ 
 pesl ; as, 
 
 e stress of tin 
 ?s a Trochaic ; 
 lie verse con 
 
 c ; 
 
 S«' 
 
 pests ; as, 
 uy. 
 
 y, called th< 
 
 mitential and harmonic. The sentential takes place 
 after the comma, semicolon, &c., as the sense may re- 
 quire ; the harmonic, which tends to preserve the melody 
 of the verse,ij divided into the final and the caesural pauses. 
 The final pause takes place at the end of every line, 
 although the sense may not require it ; it also marks the 
 difference on many occasions between prose and verso. 
 The caesural pause divides the line into equal or unequal 
 parts ; as. 
 
 Round broken columns" clas])ini; ivy tnincd, 
 O'er heaps of ruin" stalked tlie stately hind. 
 
 PUNCTUATION 
 
 Is the art of dividing a written) composition into 
 sentences, or parts of sentences, by points or stoj^s for the 
 purpose of marking the dillbrent pauses which the sense 
 and an accurate pronunciation require. 
 
 The Comma represents the shortest pause ; the Semi- 
 colon, a pause double that of the comma ; the Colmi, 
 double that of the semicolon ; and the Period double that 
 of the colon. 
 
 The points are marked in the following manner ; 
 The Conuna , The Colon : 
 
 The Semicolon j The Period . 
 
 COMMA. 
 
 The Comma usually separates those parts of a sen- 
 tence, which, though very <'Iosely conm-cted in sense, 
 require a j)ause between them; as, " 1 rcnuMubor, with 
 gratitude, his love and services." " Charles is beloved, 
 esteemed, and resi)ecled." 
 
 UULMS FOR THE COMMA. 
 
 Rule I. A biiuple sentence in general re(iuii'es no point 
 oxcejH a full stop at the end ; as, " Vir(u(! refiies ilic 
 affections." But, when a sinijile sentence is long, and 
 the nominative separated from the verb by some interven- 
 ing wonls, a conuna should be inserted iniuieibiUi'ly be- 
 fore the verb ; as, "The good taste of the present a-je, 
 hn^ not allowed us to neglect the eultivaliori i>f the En- 
 glish langur>. e." 
 
 i^neiAions. — What is iniiictiintion % What do tlie ('iMiima. Coloii , 
 Ite. rcprestntt How arc the points uiurked i \Miut doivx ttm 
 (''jintnu 81'purate { 
 
u 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAH. 
 
 3ii 
 
 n 
 
 it 
 
 Rule II. W\ en the connection of tlie different parts of 
 a sentence is interrupted by an imperfect phrase, a com- 
 ma is usually introduced at the beginning and end of this 
 phrase : as " I remember, zvith (jratitudei his kindness 
 to me." 
 
 Huh III. When two or more parts of speech occur in 
 the same construction without a conjunction between 
 them, they should be parted by a comma ; as, " Truths 
 justice^ and mercy dwell here." " Plain, honest truth 
 wants no artificial covering." " David was a iyave^ 
 un.<ie,just, and pious man." " In a letter we may advise, 
 exhort., comfort., request, and discuss." " He lived esteem- 
 ed, respected, and loved by all." " tie nvXcd priidcntli/, 
 steadili/, and vi^'orously." Dul, when two parts of speech 
 are immediately connected by a conjunction, the comma 
 should not be introduced ; as, " How great the contrast 
 between virtue and vice, wisiloni ond folly." " He is 
 just and iionest." " Study expands and elevates the 
 mind." 
 
 Rule IV. Participles, followed by something that de- 
 jx'iuls on them, are generally separated from the rest of 
 the sentence by commas ; as, " The king, approvinij/ of 
 the plan, put it in execution." 
 
 RuJc v. When a conjunction is separated from the 
 word to which it belongs, the intervening j)hrnse shouKl 
 have a comma at each exlreniily ; as, '* They set out 
 early, and, before eveniiiii, arnv(nl at the d(\slined place." 
 Rule VI. Expressions, in direct address, are followed 
 by a comma ; as, " Jfif sonn give irie thy heart ;" " I am 
 i»l)liured to yon, mjf friends, for your many favours." 
 
 /I'u/c' vii. The case absolute, and the infinitive mood 
 absolute, should Ix* separated from tlie rest ol'the sentence 
 by commas ; as, '" His fit/ier </i/i>f</, he succeeded to the 
 estate." '" To confes.7 the truth, I was much in fault." 
 
 Rule VIII. Nouns in ap[)osition, when something is 
 ;i(ided by way of explanation, should be set oil' by com- 
 mas ; as, " Paul, the Apostle of the Gentiles ;" but if 
 s«ich nouns are single, tliey are not separated : as, " Paul 
 the Apostle." "The emperor Antoninus."' 
 
 Ride IX. Simple members of sentenres, connected by 
 comparatives, arc generally distinguisln>d by commas, un- 
 
PUNCTUATION. 
 
 85 
 
 3i'ent parts ot 
 rase, a com- 
 d end of this 
 his kindness 
 
 ech occur in 
 
 on between 
 
 as, " Truth, 
 
 honest trutli 
 
 as a irave, 
 
 may advise, 
 
 lived esteem- 
 
 d prudently, 
 
 its of speech 
 
 , the comma 
 
 the contrast 
 
 ." " He is 
 
 elevates the 
 
 ing that de- 
 1 tiic rest of 
 ipproving of 
 
 ?d from the 
 n-a(<e should 
 'iley set out 
 iiieil place.*' 
 ijv followed 
 rt ;" " I am 
 ours." 
 iiitivo mood 
 the sentence 
 -x^dod to the 
 in fault." 
 omethlng is 
 oil' by com- 
 les ;" but if 
 : as, " Paul 
 
 )nnectod by 
 ommas, un- 
 
 less the sentences are veryshort; as, ^^As the heart panteth 
 after the water, so my soul panteth after Thee." " It is 
 hetter to acquire wisdom than gold." 
 
 Rule X. A remarkable expression, a short observation, 
 or a quotation, may be properly marked by a comma; as, 
 " He often made use of these words, Kncno thyself.^'' 
 " Plutarch calls lying, tliQ vice of slaves^ 
 
 Rule XI. Relative pronouns, being connective words, 
 generally admit a comma before them ; as, " He preaches 
 sublimely, who lives virtuously." " This is the tree, which 
 produces no fruit." But,' if the relative is followed by a 
 })hrase tending to confine the antecedent to some particu- 
 lar sense, the comma should be omitted before the rela- 
 tive ; as, "A man w/to deviates from the truth, will not 
 be credited.'' 
 
 Rule xn. The verb to ho, when followed by the infin- 
 itive mood, or the particle that, should have a comma 
 after it ; as, " The most prudent course is, to withdraw 
 from the country." " My desire w, that you go immedi- 
 ately." 
 
 Rule XIII. When a verb or another part of speech is 
 understood, a comma should be introduced in its place ; 
 as, " From law ariscc security ; from security, curiosity ; 
 from curiosity, knowledge." 
 
 Rule XIV. The words may, so, hencc^ ajain, firsts 
 tecondly, now, lastly, once more, in short, Stc, should be 
 generally 'separated from the context by commas ; as, 
 " He is my friend •, formerly, the supporter of my infancy ; 
 i%ow, the guardian of my youth." 
 
 Rule XV. The simple sentences and cxpla*iatory 
 phrases that make up a compound sentence, shouUl be 
 generally separated from each other by commas; as, 
 " Very often, wliilc we are complaining of the vanity and 
 the evils of human life, we make that vanity, and increase 
 those evils." 
 
 Observation. — It is not cosy to give rules] that will apply in every 
 case for the insertion of commas. As tlicy arc generally used to 
 distinguish the sense, their introduction v/i\\ greatly depend on the 
 meaning of tbe sentence. 
 
 SEMICOLON. 
 
 The Semicolon is used for dividing compound sentence* 
 
 D2 
 
86 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR! 
 
 into two or more parts not so flosoly connected as those 
 which are separated by a comma, nor yet so little depen- 
 dent on eacii other as those which are distin^iuished by 
 a colon ; as, " Straws swim upon the surface ; but pearls 
 lie at the bottom." 
 
 Note— The Semicolon is scmetinies used, ivIkmi the preceding 
 member of tlie sentence does not of ii'dC jiive a complete sense, but 
 depends on tlie fullowin;^ <•l,lu^:e : iiiid snnK'times. \'b(iD tlie sense of 
 that menil)cr would l)(; eoniplete williout, the eoiiclndini!; one; as, 
 '•' Homer was tlie f>;rc;ittir genius ; \ irgil, the better artist ; in the 
 one we more admire tiie man : in the ((tluM-, the \\(irk." " Heligion 
 does not require th;it man slu/uld n.lreat from ■worldly atfuirs 5 mucl> 
 less, that he should neglect I' ri.> "' 
 
 OF,0N. 
 
 The Colon is u^:o(l to divide a sentence into two or 
 more parts less connected than those uhich are separated 
 by a semicoh)n ; but not st) indei)endent as separate, 
 distinct sentences. 
 
 Nolr. — The Cnlon may be applied in tlie fdUowinp; eases ; — 
 
 1. When a mrnibimf a senteiuc iscoinplit(> in itstil'. but followed 
 by siiinc sui)i)lemental remark, or further illnstratidn ol the sniiject ; 
 as, '• Nature f.'lt her iiial)ilily to extricate herself fri»m the conse- 
 quences of guilt : the gospel reveals the plan of Divine interposition 
 and .lid/^ " 
 
 2. >Vhen several semicolons have preceded, and a still greater 
 pause is necessary, in order to make the concluding- sentiment; as, 
 " Religion sanctions it ; reason Jipprovcs it ; justice demands it : 
 these are C!)nsi(lM-atioii.'i wliich (iuglit to have the greatest weight in 
 your decision. "-■ 
 
 3. I he Colon is commoMly use 1 when an example, a quotation, 
 &o., is introduerd : as, '■ 'i'h(! Scripture gives us an amiable repre- 
 sentation of the Deity in tliese words: ' (iod is love.' " '' lie was 
 heard to say: ' I have done with liip world.""' And sometimes 
 when a conjunction is understood: as, ''Do not deceive yourselves 
 longer : there is no room for hope." 
 
 PKIUOD. 
 
 When a sentence is complete and independent, and 
 
 not connected in construction with die luUowing sentence, 
 
 it is marked with a period. 
 
 Note. — Sf)me sentiiRu s are independent of each other both in 
 their sense and construction ; as, " Fear (!od. Honour the king. 
 Have charity towards all men." Others are independent only in 
 their grammatical constructi(;n; as, "The Supreme Being changes 
 not, either in His d( sire to promote our happiness, or in llie plan of 
 His administration. One light always shines upon us from above. 
 One clear at>d direct path is pointed out to man." 
 
 The period shouhl be used after every abbreviated word ; as, 
 " M. S. P. S. N. B. A. D. O. S. N. S." kc. 
 
 Questions. — For whiit is Uic Semicolon used 1 What is a Colon ? 
 VVhul ib a I'cjioa 1 
 
ted as those 
 
 little depen- 
 
 iguished by 
 
 ; but pearls 
 
 the preceding 
 Itite sonsCj but 
 i tlie sense of 
 
 ilin 
 
 X one ; as. 
 
 artist ; in the 
 ' " lleligion 
 ulFairs 3 much 
 
 into two or 
 e separated 
 s separate, 
 
 nsrs ; — 
 ", lint followed 
 : the subject ; 
 m the eonse- 
 iiitcrjinsitioii 
 
 still greater 
 
 ntimeiitj as, 
 
 dcniiuids it : 
 
 est weight iii 
 
 a quotation, 
 liiahle rcpre- 
 '' lie was 
 d sometimes 
 ve yourselves 
 
 lulent, and 
 l; sentence, 
 
 ther both in 
 iir the king, 
 lent only in 
 eing changes 
 n the plan of 
 from above. 
 
 I word ; as, 
 is a Colon ? 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 87 
 
 Besides the points which mark the pauses in discourse, there are 
 others that denote a diflereiit modulation of voice in correspondence 
 to the sense. These are, ^ 
 
 The Interrogative point ? 
 
 The Exclanintion point ! 
 
 The Parenthesis () ; 
 
 as, " Are vou sincere ?" 
 
 " How excclleni is a grateful heart !'' 
 
 " Know then this truth, (enough for man to know) 
 '■■' Virtue alone is hiipjiiiioss below." 
 
 The following characters are also frequently used in 
 •composition. 
 
 An Apostrophe, marked thus ' ; as, " tho', judg'd." 
 
 am 
 A Caret, marked thus a ; as, " I a dilip;ent." 
 A Hyphen, wiiich is marked - ; as^, " Lap-dog, to- 
 
 morrow.'' 
 
 The Acute Accent, marked thus'; as, " Faii'cy." 
 
 The Grave Accent, tiius ' ; as, " Fa'voiir." 
 
 The pro]HM' mnrk to distinguish a long syllable is 
 this - ; as, Ro; y," ami a short one, thus i- ; as, " Folly.'* 
 Tills last mark is called a Bieve. The Broad Accent is 
 marked with a Circumllex ; as, in "Hall."' 
 
 A Diaeresis, thus marked • , shows that two vowels 
 form separate syllables ; as, '• Crciitor." 
 
 A Section is thus marked §. 
 
 A Paragraph, thus IF. 
 
 A Quotation has two inverted commas at the be- 
 ginning, and two direct ones at the end of a phrase or 
 |)assage ; as, 
 
 '• The proper study of mankind is man." 
 
 Crotciiets or Brackets serve to enclose a particular 
 word or setuencc. 'I'hey arc marked thus, []. 
 
 An Index or Hand {^ points out a remarkable 
 passage. 
 
 A Brace / unites three poetical lines ; or connects a 
 
 number of words in ))rose with one common termc 
 
 An /.sterisk or little star* directs the redder to some 
 note in the margin, or at foot of the page. 
 
8S 
 
 ENGLISH GRAM&TAR. 
 
 ;fl 
 
 An Ellipsis is thus marked- 
 ibr King. 
 
 as, « K g, 
 
 '5 
 
 An Obelisk, which is marked thus f, Double'.Obelisk, 
 thus f , and Parallels, thus 1|, together with the letters of 
 the alphabet, and figures, are used as references to the 
 
 margin. 
 
 CAPITALS. 
 
 The following words should begin with capitals ; 
 
 1. The first word of every book, chapter, letter, 
 paragraph, &c. 
 
 2. The first word after a period, and frequently after 
 the notes of interrogation and exclamation. 
 
 3. The names of the Deity ; ac, God, Jehovah, the 
 Supreme Being, &c. 
 
 4. Proper names of persons, places, ships, &c, 
 
 5. Adjectives derived from the proper names of places ; 
 as, Grecian, Roman, English, &c. 
 
 6. The first word of an example, and of a quotation in 
 a direct form ; as, " Always remember this ancien'; 
 niaxini ;" " Know thyself." 
 
 7. The first word of every line in poetry. 
 
 8. The pronoun /, and the interjection 0! 
 
 ^K Words of particular importance j as, the Reforma- 
 tion, the Restoration, the Revolution. 
 
 10. Words contracted j as, Mr., Mrs., Dr., Cr., A. 
 D., P. S., Esq., &c. 
 
 EXERCISES IN PUNCTUATION. 
 
 SECTION I. — Containing sentences that require the inser- 
 tion of the comma according to the Rides. 
 
 Rule I. The tear of repentance brings its own relief. 
 Idleness is the great fomenter of all corruptions in the hu- 
 man^heart. All finery is a sign of littleness. Many of the 
 [)retended friendships of youth are mere combinations in 
 pleasure. The indulgence of harsh dispositions is the in- 
 troduction of future misery. 
 
 Rule II. Gentleness is in truth the great avenue to 
 mutuu! enjoyment. Charity like the sun brightens all its 
 objects. Trials in this stage of being are the lot of 
 man. 
 
 R'Ale III. Reason virtue answer one great aim. The 
 husband wife and children suffered extremely. Health 
 
PUNCTUATION. 
 
 89 
 
 *K g, 
 
 ') 
 
 )le;Obelisk, 
 \G letters of 
 ices to the 
 
 itals ; 
 iter, letter, 
 
 uently after 
 
 3hovah, the 
 
 &c. 
 
 ;s of places; 
 
 quotation in 
 this ancien'; 
 
 16 Reforma- 
 )r., Cr., A. 
 
 re the inser- 
 ies. 
 
 own relief. 
 IS in the hu- 
 Many of the 
 ibinations in 
 ms is tiie in- 
 
 t avenue to 
 ghtens all its 
 } the lot of 
 
 aim. The 
 sly. Health 
 
 peace a moderate fortune and a few friends make up the 
 sum of temporal felicity. Temperance, and industry 
 will gain competency. A religious sensible and well 
 educated woman. He advised exhorted reasoned and 
 entreated his friend. Virtue supports in adversity moder- 
 ates in prosperity. He reads and writes well. A man 
 fearing serving and loving his Creator. To live soberly 
 and piously comprehends the whole duty of man. 
 
 Rule IV. His talents formed for great enterprises could 
 not fail of rendering him conspicuous. All mankind 
 compose one family assembled under the eye of one 
 commoh father. 
 
 Rule V. He may rest assured that by the steady pur- 
 suit of virtue we shall obtain our end. If from any exter- 
 nal cause a man's mind be disturbed. 
 
 Rule VI. Continue my child to practise virtue. To 
 you my respected friends I am much indebted. 
 
 Rule vii. Peace of mind being restored we may smile 
 at misfortune. Charles being absent the business was 
 concluded without him. To enjoy present pleasure he 
 sacrificed his future ease. To confess the truth I am to 
 blame. 
 
 Rule viii. Hope the balm of life soothes us under 
 every misfortune. Contentment the oiTspring of virtue 
 dwells in retirement. Joseph the patriarch is an iRustrious 
 example of chastity and resignation. 
 
 Ride IX. The more a man speaks of himself the less he 
 likes to hear others spoken of. Nothing more strongly 
 inculcates resignation than the experience of our own in- 
 ability to guide ourselves. 
 
 Ruh X. One of the noblest of the Christian virtues 
 is "to love our enemies." Remember this proverb 
 " Know thyself." 
 
 ■ ' IS 
 
 which reflects every object in its just proportions. Beware 
 of those connections which may load you with dishonour. 
 They who raise envy will easily incur censure. 
 
 Rule XII. The greatest misery is to be condemned by 
 our own hearts. His highest enjoyment was to relieve 
 the distressed and good. It is a fact that we must die. 
 
 Rv^Q XIII. Intemperance leads to want, from want to 
 
 Rule XI. The gentle mind is like the smooth stream 
 
 u 
 
90 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 misery from misery to sickness and from sickness to death. 
 He led forth his army figlits conquers and returns in 
 triumph. 
 
 Rule XIV. Be assured then tliat order shall prevail. I 
 will |)r()ceed secondly to point out our position. Finally, 
 I will repeat what I have ah'eady said. 
 
 Rule XV. To improve time while we arc blessed with 
 health will soothe the bed of sickness. Very often while 
 we are complaining of the vanity and evils of life we make 
 that vanity and increase those evils. If vouth be triiled 
 away without improvement riper years may be contemp- 
 tible and old age miserable. 
 
 SECTION II. — Sentences rrqidrin^/ the Sc.nicolon and 
 
 Comma, 
 
 The path of truth is plain and safe the path of falsehood 
 is a perplexing maxe. The passions are the chief de- 
 stroyers (.)f our peace the storms and tempests of the 
 moral worlil. Heaven is the region of gentleness and 
 peace e;irt!i a place of trial and \t\\ation. Levity is fre- 
 quently the forced i)roducti()u of lolly or vice cheerfulness 
 the natural olVspring of wisdom ami viitue. 
 
 SECTION 111. — Se)it('ncc,'! reqinrhnj the Colon, cVc. 
 
 The tliree great enemies to tranquillity are vice super- 
 stition and idleness vice which poisons and disturbs the 
 mind with bad jjassions superstition which fills it with 
 imaginary terrors idleness which loads it with tediousness 
 and distrust. 
 
 A mctajihor is a comparison expressed in an abridged 
 form but without any of the words that denote compari- 
 son as " To the upright there urisetli light in darkness.'' 
 
 SECTION IV. — Sentences- rcquirhiff the insertion of the 
 
 Period, ^-c. 
 
 The absence of evil is real good Worldly pleasures 
 when too eagerly sought after tend to corruj)t the heart 
 Feeding the iiungry clothing the naked and comforting the 
 afili(.A(l afibrd true pleasure to the virtuous mind. If wo 
 look around us we shall see that the whole universe is 
 fuil of a(^tive power Remember thy Creator in the days 
 of thy youth I know this my friend that I have com- 
 mitted an error. 
 
PUNCTUATION. 
 
 91 
 
 3 to death, 
 returns in 
 
 rcvail. I 
 Finally, 
 
 ^sscd with 
 
 (ten while 
 
 we make 
 
 be trifled 
 
 contenip- 
 
 olon and 
 
 falsehood 
 chief de- 
 ;sts of the 
 eness and 
 ,-itv is fre- 
 icei'fulness 
 
 n, S,r. 
 ice super- 
 stuibs the 
 lis it with 
 idiousness 
 
 abridged 
 
 compari- 
 
 larivness." 
 
 on of the 
 
 pleasures 
 tlie heart 
 fortinn; the 
 I If wo 
 niverse is 
 ihe days 
 avc com- 
 
 >/ 
 
 SECTION V. — Sentences requirmg the Capitals, poin 
 
 Interrogation, c^-c. 
 
 Histoi-y informs us That Constantino The groat, After 
 his advancement to Sole DoMiinion of the roman worid, 
 openly professed The christian faith, you know, that i 
 Wish to cultivate your Ac(iuaintance. solomon, the Son 
 of david, built the Temple of Jerusalem ; he was the 
 richest Monarch of the jews. Of whom were the Arti- 
 cles bou«rht. To wiio*n was the money i)aid. Who 
 counted It. Ah me. What folly. 
 
 regard the World with cautious eye, 
 nor Raise your expectations high. 
 Bee That the Balanced scales be such, 
 you neither fear nor ho})e too much. 
 
 SECTION VI. — Proiuiscuons exomples of de feci Ive Punctu- 
 ation, misapiUkation of Capitals, S^c. 
 
 W^hen Socrates was asked what man approached the 
 nearest to perfect iuip[)iness he answered That JMan who 
 has the lowest wants 
 
 She who studies her Glass neglects her lieart 
 
 Between Passion and Lying there is not a Finger's 
 breailth 
 
 The Freer we feel ourselves in the Presence of others 
 the more free are they he who is free makes free 
 
 Addison has remarked with equal Piety and Truth 
 that the Creation is a perpetual Feast to the Mind of a 
 Good Man 
 
 He who shuts out all evasion when he promises loves 
 truth 
 
 Tlie laurels of the Warrior arc dyed in Blood and 
 bedewed with Tears of the Widow and the Orphan 
 
 Between Fame and true Honour a Distinction is to be 
 made The former is a loud and noisy Applause the latter 
 a more silent and internal Homage Fame floats on the 
 Breath of the Multitude Honour rests on the Judgement 
 of the Thinking Fame May give Praise while it withholds 
 esteem true Honour implies Esteem mingled with respect 
 The one regards Particular distinguished Talents the 
 other looks up to the whole character. 
 
«>. 
 
 ia^ ":^a> 
 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.25 
 
 121 115 
 
 *^ lU 12.2 
 
 !!f 144 ■" 
 2.0 
 
 us 
 
 Itt 
 
 ml] 
 
 U£ I 
 
 MUi. 
 
 • 1 
 
 p^ 
 
 
 *» 
 
 ■^ 
 
 FhologFaphic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporalion 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 33 WIIT MAIN STRUT 
 WIUTM.N.Y. USM 
 
 ('U)I73>4S03 
 
 
 6^ 
 

 v.. 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 > 
 
 
 \ 
 
92 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 If I am right thy grace impart 
 
 Still in the right to stay 
 Jf I am wrong O teach my heart 
 
 To find that better way 
 
 Save me alike from foolish pride 
 
 Or impious discontent 
 At aught thy wisdom has denied. 
 
 Or aught thy goodness lent 
 
 lost to virtue lost to manly thought 
 Lost to the noble sallies of the soul 
 "Who think it solitude to be alone 
 Communion sweet communion iai^e and high 
 Our reason guardian angel and our God 
 Then nearest these when others most remote 
 And all ere long shall be remote but these 
 
 Know then this truth enough for man to know 
 
 Virtue alone is happiness below 
 
 The only point where human bliss stands still 
 
 And tastes the good without the fall to ill 
 
 Where only merit constant pay receives 
 
 Is blest in what it takes and what it gives 
 
 The joy unequall d if its end it gain 
 
 And if it lose attended with no pain 
 
 Without satiety tho e er so blest 
 
 And but more relish d as the more distress d 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Containing inttances of false Syntax promitcftouily 
 
 Though great has been his disobedience and his folly, 
 yet if he sincerely acknowledges his misconduct, he will 
 be forgiven. 
 
 On these causes depend all the happiness or misery, 
 which exist among men. 
 
 The property of James, I mean his books and furni- 
 ture, were wholly destroyed. 
 
 This prodigy of learning, this scholar, critic, and anti- 
 quarian, ivere entirely destitute of breeding and civility. 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 93 
 
 That writer has given an account of the manner in 
 which Christianity has formerly been propagated among 
 the heathens. 
 
 We adore the Divine Being, he who is from eternity to 
 eternity. 
 
 Thou, Lord, who hath permitted affliction to come up- 
 on us, shall deliver us from it in due time. 
 
 In this place there were not only security, but an 
 abundance of provisions. 
 
 By these attainments are the master honoured, and the 
 scholars encouraged. 
 
 The sea appeared to be more than usually agitated. 
 
 Not one in fifty of those who call themselves deists 
 understand the nature of the religion they reject. 
 
 Virtue and mutual confidence is the soul of friendship. 
 Where these are wanting, disgust or hatred often follow 
 little differences. 
 
 I'ime and chance happeneth to all men j hut every 
 person do not consider who govern those powerful causes. 
 
 The active mind of man never or seldom rests satisfied 
 with their present condition, however prosperous. 
 
 Habits must be acquired of temperance and of self- 
 denial, that we may be able to resist pleasure, and to 
 endure pain, when either o( them interfere with our duty. 
 
 The error of resting wholly on faith, or on works, is 
 one of those seductions which nioj-t easily misleads men; 
 under the semblance of piety, on the one hanil, and of 
 virtue on the other hand. 
 
 It was no exaggerated tale ; for she was really in that 
 sad condition that her friend represented her. 
 
 An army present a painful sight to a feeling mind. 
 
 The enemies who wo have most fear, are those of our 
 own hearts. 
 
 Thou art the Messiah, the Son of God, who was to 
 come into the world, and has been so long promised 
 and desired. 
 
 Thomas disposition is l)etter than his brothers ; and he 
 appears to bo the happiest man : but some degree of trou- 
 ble is all mens portion. 
 
 Though remorse sleep sometimes during prosperity, it 
 will a^vake surely in adversity. 
 
94. 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 It is an invariable law to our present condition thatevery 
 pleasure that are pursued to excess, convert themselves 
 into poison. 
 
 If a man brings into the solitary retreat of age a vacant 
 and unimproved mind, where no knowledge dawns, no 
 ideas rise, which within itself has nothing to feed upon, 
 many a heavy and many a comfortless day he must 
 necessarily pass. 
 
 I cannot yield to such dishonourable conduct, neither 
 at the present moment of difficulty, nor, I trust, under no 
 circumstance whatever. 
 
 He resembles one of those solitary animals that has 
 been forced from its forest to gratify human curiosity. 
 
 There is not, nor ought not to be, such a thing as con- 
 structive treason . 
 
 He is a new created knight, and his dignity sits awk- 
 ward on him. 
 
 Hatred or revenge are things deserving of censure 
 wherever they are found to exist. 
 
 If you please to employ your thoughts on that subject, 
 you would easily conceive our miserable condition. 
 . His speech contains one of the grossest and infamous- 
 est calumnies which ever was uttered. 
 
 A too great variety of studies dissipate and weaken 
 the mind. 
 
 Those two authors have each of them their merit. 
 
 James was resolved to not indulge himself in such a 
 cruel amusement. 
 
 Tlie not attending to this rule is the source of a very 
 common error. 
 
 Calumny and detraction are sparks, which if you do 
 not blow, they will go out of themselves. 
 
 Clelia is a vain woman, whom if we do not flatter, 
 she will be disgusted. 
 
 That celebrated work was nearly ten years published 
 before its importance was at all understood. 
 
 Ambition is so insatiable that it will make any sacri- 
 fice to attain its objects. 
 
 A great mass of rocks thrown together by the hand of 
 nature with wildness and confusion strike the mind 
 with more grandeur than if they were adjusted to one 
 another with the accuratest symmetry. 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 9$ 
 
 \thatevery 
 themselves 
 
 e a vacant 
 dawns, no 
 feed upon, 
 f he must 
 
 ict, neither 
 ;, under no 
 
 Is that has 
 iriosity. 
 ing as con- 
 sits avvk- 
 of censure 
 
 lat subject, 
 lition. 
 infamous- 
 
 nd weaken 
 
 merit. 
 
 in sucli a 
 
 I of a very 
 
 I if you do 
 
 not flatter, 
 3 published 
 
 any sacri- 
 
 hc hand of 
 
 the mind 
 
 ited to one 
 
 They that honour me, I will honour j and them, that 
 despise me, shall be lightly esteemed. 
 
 Reason's whole pleasure, all the joys of sense, 
 Lies in three words, health, peace, and competence. 
 
 Having thus began to throw off the restraints of reason, 
 he was soon hurried into deplorable excesses. 
 
 These arts have enlightened, and will enlighten, every 
 l>erson who shall attentively study them. 
 
 When we succeed in our plans, it is not to be attributed 
 always to ourselves ; the aid of others often promote the 
 end, and claim our acknowledgment. 
 
 Their intention were good ; but wanting prudence, 
 they missed the mark for which they aimed. 
 
 1 have not, nor shall not consent to a proposal so unjust. 
 
 We have subjected ourselves to much expense that 
 thou may be well educated. 
 
 This treaty was made at Earl Moreton the Governor's 
 castle. 
 
 Be especially careful that thou givest no offence to the 
 aged or helpless. 
 
 The business was no sooner opened, but it was cordially 
 acquiesced in. 
 
 As to his general conduct, he deserved punishment as 
 much, or more than his companion. He left a son of a 
 singular character, and behaved so ill that he was put in 
 ])rison. 
 
 If he docs but approve my endeavours, it will be an 
 ample reward. 
 
 1 beg the favour of your acceptance of a copy of a 
 view of the manufactories of the West Riding of tlio 
 coimty of York. 
 
 I intended to have written the letter before he urged 
 me to it ; and, therefore, he has not all the merit of it. 
 
 All the power of riilicule, aided by the desertion of 
 friends, and the diminution of his estate, were not able 
 to shake his principles. 
 
 No human happiness is so complete as does not con- 
 tain some imperfection. 
 
 His father cannot hope for this success unless his son 
 gives better proofs of genius, or applies himself with inde- 
 fatigable labour. 
 
96 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The house framed a remonstrance where they spoke 
 with great freedom of the king's prerogative. 
 
 The conduct, which has been mentioned, is one of 
 those artifices which seduces men most easily under ap- 
 pearance of benevolence. 
 
 This is the person, who we are so much obliged to, 
 and who we expected to have seen, when the favour 
 was conferred. 
 
 He is a person of great proptirty, but does not possess 
 the esteem of his neighbours. 
 
 They were solicitous to ingratiate with those, who it 
 was dishonourable to favour. 
 
 The great diversity, which takes place among men, is 
 not owing to a distinction that nature made in their orig- 
 inal powers, as much as to the superior diligence with 
 which some have improved those powers beyond others. 
 
 While we are unoccupied in what is good, evil is at 
 hand continually. 
 
 Not a creature is there that moves, nor a vegetable 
 grows, but what, when minutely examined, furnished 
 materials of pious admiration. 
 
 What can be the reason of the committee having de- 
 layed this business ? 
 
 I know not whether Charles was the author, but I un- 
 derstood it to be he. 
 
 A good and well cultivated mind is far more preferable 
 than rank or riches. 
 
 Neither flatter nor contemn the rich or the great. 
 
 He has travelled much, and passed tiuough many 
 stormy seas and lands. 
 
 You must be sensible that there is, and can be, no 
 other person but me who could give the imformati«)n 
 desired. 
 
 To be patient, resigned, and thankful, under atllictions 
 and disappointments, demonstrate genuine piety. 
 
 Alvarez was a man of corrupt principles, and of de- 
 testable conduct ; and, what is still worse, gloried in his 
 shame. 
 
 As soon as the sense of the Supreme Being is lost so 
 soon the great check is taken off which keep under re- 
 :itraint the passions of men. Mean desires, low pleas* 
 
l>ROMtSCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 m 
 
 ey spoke 
 
 is one of 
 inder ap- 
 
 bliged to, 
 le favour 
 
 >t possess 
 
 (, who it 
 
 ; men, is 
 leir orig- 
 nce with 
 d others, 
 evil is at 
 
 vegetable 
 furnished 
 
 ving de- 
 
 jut I un- 
 
 referable 
 
 at. 
 
 h many 
 
 n be, no 
 jrmation 
 
 mictions 
 
 1 of de- 
 d in his 
 
 s lost so 
 ider re- 
 r pleas- 
 
 ures, take place of the greater and the nobler sentiments 
 which reason and religion inspires. 
 
 We should be careful not to follow the example of 
 many persons, to censure the opinions, manners, and 
 customs of others, merely because they are foreign to us. 
 
 Steady application, as well as genius and abilities, are 
 necessary to produce eminence. 
 
 There is in that seminary several students considera- 
 bly skilled in mathematical knowledge. 
 
 If Providence clothe the grass of the field, and shelters 
 and adorns the flowers that every where grows wild 
 amongst it, will he not clothe and protect his servants 
 and children much more ? 
 
 We are too often hurried with the violence of passion, 
 or with the allurements of pleasure. 
 
 High hopes and florid views is a great enemy to 
 tranquillity. 
 
 Year after year steal something from us till the decay- 
 ing fabric totters of itself, and crumbles at length into dust. 
 
 I intended to have finished the letter before the bearer 
 called, that he might not have been detained j but I was 
 prevented by company. 
 
 EXERCISE. — A few instances of the same words constitut- 
 ing several oftJie parts of speech. 
 
 Calm was the day, and the scene (Jelightful. 
 
 We may expect a calm after a storm. 
 
 To prevent passion is easier than to calm it. 
 
 Better is a little with content, than a great deal with 
 anxiety. 
 
 Tile gay and dissolute think little of the miseries which 
 are stealing softly after them. 
 
 A little attention will rectify some errors. 
 
 Though he is out of danger, he is still afraid. 
 
 He laboured to still the tumult. 
 
 The few and the many have their prepossessions. 
 
 Few (lays pass without some clouds. 
 
 Much money is corrupting. 
 
 Think much, and speak little. 
 
 He has seen much of the world, and been much 
 caressed. 
 
 
 'i ■ ■ 
 
 : ' i 
 
 
 i-<i^ 
 
ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 His years are more than hers ; but he has not more 
 
 knowledge. 
 
 The more we are blessed, the more grateful we should 
 be. 
 
 The desire of getting more is rarely satisfied. 
 
 He has equal knowledge, but inferior judgment. 
 
 She is his inferior in sense, but his equal in prudence. 
 
 We must make like space between the lines. 
 
 Still waters are commonly deepest. 
 
 Damp air is unwholesome. 
 
 Guilt often casts a damp over our sprightliest hours. 
 
 Soft bodies damp the sound much more than hard 
 ones. 
 
 Though she is rich and fair, yet she is not amiable. 
 
 They are yet young, and must suspend their judgment 
 yet awhile. 
 
 Many persons are letter Ihan we suppose them to be. 
 
 Every thing loves its like. 
 
 Behave yourselves like men. 
 
 We are too apt to like pernicious company. 
 
 He may go or stay as be likes. 
 
 They strive to learn. 
 
 He goes to and fro. 
 
 To his wisdom we owe our privilege. 
 
 The proportion is ten lo one. 
 
 He served with his utmost ability. 
 
 When we do our utmost, no more is required. 
 
 I will submit, for submission brings peace. 
 
 It is for our health to be temperate. 
 
 ! for better times. 
 
 1 have a regard for him. 
 
 He is esteemed, both on his own account, and on thoi 
 of his parents. 
 
 Both of them deserve praise. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 99 
 
 not more 
 we should 
 
 ;nt. 
 prudence. 
 
 5t hours, 
 than hard 
 
 miable. 
 : judgment 
 
 lem to be. 
 
 ed. 
 
 and on thai 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Containing Rules for assisting young persons to write 
 with perspicuity and accuracy. 
 
 PERSPICUITY. 
 
 Perspicuity or clearness is the fundamental quality of style : a 
 quality so essential in every kind of writing that for the want of it 
 nothing can atone. Wc arc pleased with an author, who frees us 
 from the fatigue of searching for his meaning ; who carries us through 
 his subject without any embarrassment or confusion j whose style 
 flows like a limpid stream, through wiiich we see the very bottom. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Of Perspicuity and Accuracy of expression withrespect to 
 single ivords and phrases. 
 
 These qualities of style require the following properties : 
 PuiiiTY, PuopuiETY, and Precision. 
 
 si:cTiox I — Of Purity. 
 
 Purity of style consist^ in the use of such words and phrases as 
 belong to tlie idiom of the language wliich we speak ; in opposition 
 to words and phras s that arc taken from other languages, or that 
 are ungrammalical, obsolete, new-coined, &,c. All such words and 
 phrases as tlic fnlljwing should be avoided ; Quoth he ; Iwist not ; 
 crewhile ; hauteur for haughtiness ; politesse for politeness, &c. 
 
 SECTION n — Of Propriety. 
 
 Propriety of hinguagc consists in the selection of such words as the 
 best usago has approprink'd to those ideas which we intend to ex- 
 press by them. 'I'iic loUowing are the rules for propriety : 
 
 Rah:: I. Avoid loiv expressions; such as, topsy-turvy, 
 hurly-hurly, pdl-mell, currying favour, left to shift for 
 thamsdvcs, &.c. 
 
 Rule II. In the same sentence be carefid not to use the 
 same tcord too frequently, nor in different senses; as, " A 
 person may luivo an air .(/;/iiWt proceeds from a knowledge 
 of the matter heforo him, which may naturally produce 
 some motion of head or body, which might become tiie 
 bench better than the bar. 
 
 The repetition of llio pronoun which throws obscurity over the 
 %vhole sentence. " Ciiai ity expands our hearts in love to God and 
 man : it is by the virtu': of charily that the rich are blessed, and 
 the poor supplied." The word charity is improperly used tn two 
 different senses ; for the highest benevolence, and for almsgiving. 
 
 ''«« 
 
ioo 
 
 At>PENDtX. 
 
 Rule m. Avoid the injudicious use of technical terms. 
 
 Technical terms being used only by a peculiar class, we should 
 never employ them but when we know they will be understood. To 
 say, " We tacked to the larboard, and stood off to sea," would be 
 expressing ourselves very obscurely to those who do not understand 
 sea-phrases. 
 
 Rule rv. Avmd equivocal or ambiguous words; <w, 
 " He aimed at nothing less than the crown.'' 
 
 This sentence may denote either, " Nothing inferior to the crown 
 could satisfy his ambition ;" or, '< That the obtaining of the crown 
 was the least of his ambition : and so for the expression ; "I will 
 have mercy, and not sacrifice :" 
 
 Rule y. Avoid unintelligible and inconsistent words or 
 phrases ; as, " This temper of mind keeps our understand- 
 ing tight about us." 
 
 It is not easy to determine the meaning of this sentence, or 
 whether it has any meaning whatever. 
 
 Rule VI. Avoid all those words and phrases which are 
 not adapted to the ideas toe mean to communicate, or which 
 are less significant than others of those ideas ; as, 
 
 " He feels all the sorrow that can arrive at jman ; it should be 
 " happen to man." " We assent to the beauty of the objects, and 
 we acknowledge the truth of the proposition," better, *' We aclcnowl' 
 edge the beauty and assent to the truth." ** A traveller observes 
 the most striking objects ; a general remarks all the motions of the 
 enemy j" better thus, " A general observes ; a traveller remarks." 
 
 SECTION III. — Of Precision, 
 
 Precision in writing consists in retrenching superfluities, and in 
 pruning the expression, so as to exhibit neither more nor less than an 
 exact copy of the person's idea who uses it. The following are the 
 most general rules for precision j 
 
 Rule I. The words iised should exactly express the 
 idea which the author intends. 
 
 Rule II. 27iey should express that idea fuUy and com- 
 pletely. 
 
 Rule in. Thei/ should express the idea, and nothing 
 
 more. 
 
 The human mind never can view clearly and distinctly more than 
 one object at the same time. If it must look at two or three togeth- 
 er, especially objects that bear resemblance or connection, it finds 
 itself confused and embarrassed. It cannot clearly perceive in what 
 they agree and in what they differ. All subjects do not require an 
 equal degree of precision. In those of a well known and familiar 
 kind we are at no hazard of mistaking the sense of the author, 
 though every word is not precise and exact. 
 
 A great source of loose style arises from the injudicious use of 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 101 
 
 Ht!(-. 
 
 il terms. 
 , we should 
 rstood. To 
 ' would be 
 understand 
 
 ords ; of, 
 
 »the crown 
 r the crowii 
 ij «I will 
 
 words or 
 iderstand- 
 
 entencej or 
 
 which are 
 !, or iohich 
 
 Si 
 
 t should be 
 objects, and 
 '^e acJcnowl- 
 ler observes 
 itions of the 
 emarks." 
 
 les, and in 
 ess than an 
 ing are the 
 
 vpress the 
 
 and com- 
 
 d nothing 
 
 r more than 
 
 iree togeth- 
 
 Lion, it finds 
 
 ive in what 
 
 require an 
 
 ind familiar 
 
 the author, 
 
 ;iou8 use of 
 
 ■tvords which arc improperly termed synonymonsj They agree in ex- 
 pressing one principal idea ; but thoy mfjst generally express it with 
 some diversity of circumstance. The ibllon-ing are instances which 
 will show the difference in the meaning of words reputed synonymous. 
 
 Custom, habit. — By custom we mean the frequent repetition of the 
 same act ; by habit, the effect which that rcpctiUon produces on the 
 mitid or body. By the ciistojn of walking the streets a person ac- 
 quires the hitbit of idleness. 
 
 Pride, vanity. — Pride makes us esteem ourselves, Tanily makes us 
 desire the esteem of others. 
 
 Haughtiness, disdain. — Haughtiness is founded on the high opin- 
 ion we entertain of ourselves ; disdain, on the low opinion we have 
 of others. 
 
 Wisdom, prudence. — Wisdom leads us to speak and do ivhat is 
 most proper ; prudence prevents us from speaking or acting improperly. 
 
 Tranquillity, peace, culm. — Tranquillity represents a situation free 
 from trouble ; peace, the same situation with respect to any cause 
 that might interrupt it ; culm, with regard to a disturbed situation 
 going before or following it. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Of Perspimiti/, Accurmj/ of expression ivith respect to 
 
 the construction of sentences. 
 
 Sentences in general slioukl ncillier be very long, nor 
 very short: long sentences require close attention to 
 make us clearly perceive the connection of the 
 several parts ; and short ones are apt to break the sense 
 and weaken the connection of thought. A succession of 
 either long or short sentences should be avoided ; but by 
 a proper mixture of both the ear will be gratified, and 
 animation given to style. The things most essential in an 
 accurate and perfect sentence are Clearness ; Unity ; 
 Strength, and A Judicious use of the Figures op 
 Speech. 
 
 SKCTioN I. — Of the Clearness of a Sentence, 
 
 Whatever leaves the mind in suspense as to the meaning should be 
 avoided. Obscurity arises from two causes ; either from a wrong 
 choice of words, or from the arrangement of them. The following 
 rules may serve in some degree to direct the learner ^vith regard to 
 the proper disposition of words in a sentence. 
 
 Rule I. Let those words or memherSf rcMch arc clearly 
 related, he placed in the sentence as near to each other as 
 possible, so that their nmtual relation mm) clearhj appear. 
 
 Rule H. Never crowd too mawf circumstances together^ 
 hut rather intersperse them in different parts of the sen- 
 tmice, joined ivith the prhmpal imrds on which thy 
 dapend. 
 
 K 
 
 . 1 
 
102 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Obscurity frequently arises from a wrong position of the adverbs, 
 relative pronouna, and particles that express the connection of differ- 
 ent parts of speech ; as in the following examples ; •' The Romans 
 understood liberty at least as well as we." The words are capable 
 of two different meanings according as the emphasis in reading 
 them is laid upon liberty, or at least. The construction should be, 
 " The Romans understood liberty as well at least as we." " This 
 kind of wit among oi\r con ninjmm about a century ago was very 
 much in vogue, who did not use it for any other purpose than purely 
 for the sake of being witty :" it shou'd be, " This kind of wit about 
 a century ago was very much in vogue among cur countryvicn, 
 who," &,c. The relative should generally be placed immediately 
 after its antecedent. 
 
 Much obscurity sometimes arises from the too frequent use of the 
 pronouns ; as," Men look with an evil eye upon the virtues of others, 
 and think that their reputation obscures than, and their commenda- 
 ble qualities stand in their light ; andtherel\re they do ^vhat they can 
 to cast a cloud over them, that the bright shining of their virtues may 
 not obscure them," This is altogctiicr careless writing, and should 
 be avoided. 
 
 SECTION II — Of the nn'di) of a sentence. 
 To preserve Die unity of a sentence the fallowing rules should be 
 observed. 
 
 Rule J. During the course of a sentence let the scene he 
 changed as little as possible. 
 
 We shDuld not be hurried from person to person, or from object to 
 object. There is commonly in every rcntence some person or thing 
 which is the governing word ; this should be continued, if possible, 
 from the beginning to the end. 
 
 Rule II. Neccr crowd into one sentence things that have 
 so little conneclion that they could hear to he divided into 
 two or three sentences. 
 
 Tlie violation of this rule tends so much to pcrjilex and obscure the 
 sense, that it is safer to err by too many short sentences than by one 
 that is overliided and embarrassed. For instiuiec, an author tells us ; 
 " Archbishop Tillotson died in the last year, lie was exceedingly 
 beloved by King William and Mary, who nominated Dr. Tennison, 
 bishop of Lhicoln, to succeed )iim." ^Vlio would expect the latter 
 part of the sentence to follow as a consequence if the former 7 
 
 Rule in. Avoid all unnecessary paradheses. 
 
 On some occasions, uhen the sentc is not too long suspended by 
 them, and when ihey are introduced in a prcpcr place, they may add 
 both to the vivacity and ^o the energy of (i.o sciitcnec. But for the 
 most part their effect is bad ; they are wheclo within wheels ; sen- 
 tences in the miclHl. of sentences ; a perplexed method of disposing of 
 some thought, whieh th'; writer for the want of judgement did not in- 
 4,roduce in its preper ])lace. 
 
 The parenthesis in this sentence is striKinp; and proper; 
 *' And v.'as the ransoiri pnid 1 It uas ; tnid j-aid 
 " (VVliat can exalt the bounty more •.) hi' thee." 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 103 
 
 the adverbs, 
 tion of differ- 
 The Romans 
 
 are capable 
 8 in reading 
 )n should be, 
 ^e." " ThU 
 go was very 
 e than purely 
 , of wit about 
 countnjmen, 
 
 immediately 
 
 snt use of the 
 ;ues of others, 
 r commenda- 
 what they can 
 ir virtues may 
 r, and should 
 
 ce. 
 
 les should be 
 
 the scene be 
 
 from object to 
 erson or thing 
 id, if possible, 
 
 rjs that have 
 Uvidcd into 
 
 id obscure tiic 
 cs than by one 
 
 illinr tells us ; 
 exceedingly 
 
 Dr. Tennison, 
 
 )ect the latter 
 
 brmcr '] 
 
 • 
 
 suspended by 
 they may add 
 . But for the 
 wheels ; scn- 
 cf disposing of 
 cat did not in- 
 
 icr : 
 
 But in the following sentence we become sensible of an impro- 
 priety in the use of it. " If your hearts secretly reproach you for the 
 wrong choice you have made (as there is tiinc for repentance and re- 
 treat ; and a return to wisd )in is always honourable) bethink your- 
 selves that the evil is not irreparable." 
 
 The following very general rule may be given for the unity of a 
 sentence : 
 
 Make all the parts of a sentence correspond to cacli 
 other, and preserve a regular and dependent construction 
 throughout. 
 
 The following sentence is therefore inaccurate ; " He was more 
 beloved, but not so much admired as Cinthio ;" it should be, '' He 
 was more beloved than Cinthio, but not so mucli admired." 
 SECTION lit — Oftho strength of a sentence. 
 
 By strengtli of a sentence is meant such a disposition and manage- 
 ment oftho several words and members as shall bring out the sense 
 to the best advaiita|j;c, and give to every word, every member, its due 
 weight and forec. To promote the strength of a sentence the follow- 
 ing rules should be observed. 
 
 Rule I. The sentence should he primed of all redundant 
 words and mcmhers. 
 
 It is a general maxim that any word, which does not add some im- 
 portance to the meaiuiig of a sentence, always injures it. Care should 
 therefore be taken to avoid synonymous words, circumlocutions, 
 tautologies, and the expression of unnecessary circumstances. 
 
 The f, llowin;;; sentences an; faulty ; '• In the Attic conimonwealth 
 it was the privilege uiid birthright of every citizen and poet to read 
 aloud and m public." Cotter thus, " In tin Attic commoiiwealtli 
 it was the privilege of every citizen to read in public." " They 
 returned back again to the same city from which they came forth';" 
 better, " 'I'hey returned to the city whence they came." The words 
 back, again, same, from, \xw\foiih, art all uimccessary. 
 
 Ride II. The second rule is to attend partimlarly to 
 the use of copulatlcesj Q'elatives, and all particles employed 
 for tramition and, conneHimi. 
 
 The little words but, and, if, by, of, or, then, lohich, tvhosc, &c., 
 are frequently the most important Avords in a sciitct\ce. They are 
 the joints or hingt^s upon wiiich the sentence turns ; and of course 
 much of its strength will depend on these particles. The various 
 forms, in which they are used, arc so numerous that no j)articular 
 system of rules respeeting them can be given. AA'ilh regard to tlie 
 particle and, honever, it may be observed that tlie unnecessary repeti- 
 tion of it tends to eiiCecble style; and on some occasions, wiicn the 
 connection is clear Avithout it, the expression is more forcible and 
 rapid than if the particle iiad been used ; as, " I came, I saw, I 
 conquered." 
 
 Rale III. The third rule is to dispose of the capital 
 word or words so that they may make the greatest impreS' 
 sion. 
 
104 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 The important words for the most part are placed in the beginning 
 of the sentence ; as in the following examples ; " Silver and gold I 
 have none; but what I have I will give you." " Your ^fathers, 
 where are they V 
 
 Rule IV. The fourth rule is that a weaker assertion or 
 proposition sho^lld 'never come after a stronger one ; and 
 that, ivhen the sentence consists of tico members, the lon- 
 ger should generally he the concluding one» 
 
 In general it is agreeable to find a sentence rising in its progress 
 and importance to ttie very last word, when this constructton can be 
 managed without atl'ectation. 
 
 Rtde V. A sentence should never he concluded loith an 
 adverb, a preposition y or any inconsiderable word. 
 
 Thefcjllowing sentences are therefore inaccurate ; " Avarice is a 
 crime which wise men are often guilty of;" it should be '• 0/ which 
 wise men,'" &.c. " He may have been unfortunate in his business, 
 but he failed through his own neglect, to say no toor.sc." The last 
 phrase, t^ ^ay no ivorse, has a bad effect at the end of the sentence. 
 Care sliould be taken not to conclude a sentence with the words of, 
 to, with, by, it, about, &,c. 
 
 sr.CTioN III. — Tropes or Figures of Speech. 
 
 The fourth requisite of a perfect sentence is a judicious use of the 
 Figures of Speech. 
 
 In general Figures of Speech imply some departure from simplicity 
 of expression ; tlic idea, which we mean to convey, is expressed in a 
 particuhxr manner, and with some circumstance added, which is 
 designed to render I he impression more strung and vivid. When we 
 say " A good man enjoys comfort in the midst of adversity ;" we ex- 
 press our thouj;hts in tlie simplest manner ; but, wiien we say " To 
 the iiprigiit tliere ariacth a li^lit in tlii; hour of darkness," the same 
 sentiment is expressed in a figurative style ; light is put for comfort 
 and darlciicss fur adverhity. 
 
 The principal advantast s of the figures of speech are the followuig ; 
 First. Tluy enr'ch language, and render it more copious. Secoml, 
 Th(.y frequently give us a much clearer and more striking view of the 
 principal olijcct than we could have, il' it were expressed in simpli 
 terms, and liivested of ils acccssury idea. 
 
 The i'ollowiu!^' art tlie principal, viz ; 
 Mctiiplior, SyiK'cddolio, 
 
 Alk'giny, i'r'rsoiiifu'jitiou, 
 
 Coiiniarison, Apostrophe, 
 Mctoiiyiiiy, AntitliosLs, 
 
 A Mdiphor is ariufurt; Ibimdoileiitiivlyoii tlu? rosom 
 blaiit'o ^vllU'h one thine: iK.ars to imutlior ; as, wljen wc 
 say of a ;?ivat ijian, " Ifo i^^ tho pillar of the* Stato." 
 
 The following rules should lieobservdl in the use of the metaphor. 
 Huie I. Thi!y should not bu used too [)rolus<'ly, and 
 
 iryjK'fholo, 
 Ex<'hiuiation, 
 Irony, 
 Cliiuax. 
 
 
he beginning 
 r and gold I 
 'our ^fathera, 
 
 ssertion or 
 one; and 
 rs, the lon- 
 
 \ its progress 
 ictton can be 
 
 'ed with an 
 
 3rd. 
 
 ' Avarice is a 
 
 )e '* of which 
 
 his business, 
 ." The last 
 
 the sentence, 
 the words of, 
 
 H;ech. 
 
 ous use of the 
 
 rum simplicity 
 expressed in a 
 ded, which is 
 id. When we 
 •sily ;" we ex- 
 1 wc say " To 
 :3S," the same 
 )ut for comfort 
 
 the following ; 
 iouH. Secoiul, 
 iiif^ view of tht 
 hissed in sinipk 
 
 l)olo, 
 iati«)ii, 
 
 I tin' roseni 
 as, when \vi' 
 State." 
 ' tli(! mclnphor. 
 uluscly, and 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 105 
 
 m 
 
 should always be such as accord with the strain of our 
 sentiment. 
 
 Rule II. Care shoidd be taken that the resemblance, 
 which is the foundation of nictaplior, bo clear and per- 
 spicuous, not ftir-fetchod nor difficult to discover. 
 
 Rule III. Metaphorical and plain language sliould 
 never bo jumbled together. 
 
 Rule IV. Two inconsistent metaphors should never 
 meet ,on one subject ; as, 
 
 I bridle in my strugi^ling muse with pain 
 That longs to launch iulc» a bolder strain. 
 
 The muse, flgureJ as a horse, may be bridled ; but, when we speak 
 of liunching, wc make it a ship ; und by no force f)f imagination can 
 it be supposed both a horse and a ship at the same moment. 
 
 AUcyorij. — An alh^^'ory may bo rogiirdod as a meta- 
 phor continued through a series of sentences. Tlio rules 
 for the metaphor may in general be ai)plied to allajory : 
 indeed the <inly material diflerenco between the two 
 figures is, that a metai)hor always oxjilains itself by 
 words that are connected with it in their propoi* mean- 
 ing ; as, " Achilles was a lion in battle ;'' liei'o the word 
 lion is sutlieiently interpreted by tin* mention of Aehilles. 
 
 The Scriptures contain many beautiful examples ofalbgory ; wo 
 shall select one from the SOtli I'salm, wliere the people cf hracl are 
 rcprescnled under the iniaj;e of a vine ; 
 
 " Thou hast brought a vine out of T.gypt: Thou hast cast out the 
 heathen and planted it. TIjuu prepanMlst. room before it ; and didst 
 cause it to take deep root, and it filled the land, TI»e hills were 
 covered with the shadow of it : and tlie boughs lhcre(;( were like the 
 goodly cedars. She sent out her boughs unto tlic sea, nnd her 
 brauelies unto the river, WhyliastTliou broken down her hedges, so 
 that all they, wiiieh pasa by the way, do jduek her ? The In ur out of 
 the wo.d doth wasto it, and the wild beast of the field di/lli devour 
 it. Ueturn, wo boseeeh'fliee, (Jodof Hosts, look down from heaven, 
 and behold, and visit this \\\w. !" 
 
 Comparison or iSiinilc. — Com[)arison, or Simile, is the 
 resend>lance between two objects (>jcpressed in form, and 
 generally piu'sueil more fully than the uiiture of tlie met- 
 aphor admits ; as, •' True virtue is like (joJd in the 
 furnaee : the more it is heated, the brighter it chines." 
 " As the mountains are about Jerusalem, so the Lord is 
 round about His peo|>le." 
 
 Mdoiufini/. — Metonymy is the substitution of the name 
 of the cauM for the elleot, the cniifniner for the eoutained. 
 the si^n for the thing signilled ; as, " lie read Milton ;" 
 
 
106 
 
 APPENDIX, 
 
 tliat is, " Milton's works.'* " Gray hairs should bo 
 respected ;" " gray hairs" arc put for " old ago." "The 
 kettle boils ;" " kettle," for water. 
 
 Si/nccdoche. — By Synecdoche is meant the substitu- 
 tion of a part for the wliole, or a whole for a part ; as, 
 "A fleet of twenty mil." Sail, for ships; and when 
 we use the head for the person ; ivaves for the sea, &c. 
 Personification. — Personification is that figure by 
 which we attribute life and action- to inanimate objects ; 
 as, " The earth smiles with plenty ;'' Historr/ informs 
 lis ;" " The desert shall rejoice and bloom as the rose.'' 
 Apostrophe. — Apostrophe is a turning off from the 
 regular subject to address some absent person or thing ; 
 as, "Death is swallowed up in victory. O death! 
 where is thy sting ? O grave ! where is thy victory?" 
 
 Antithesis. — Antithesis is a figure which strengthens 
 the language and heiglitens the eftect by contrasting 
 objects of opposite characters; as, "If you wish to en- 
 rich a man, study not to increase his stores, but to 
 diminish his desires." " Though deep, yet clear ; though 
 gentle, yet not dull." 
 
 Hi/perhole. — The Hyperbole consists in magnifying an 
 object beyond its natural bounds ; as, when we say, 
 " As swift as the ivind ;" " As quick as liyhtning ;" 
 *' White as snow.''' 
 
 Hyperboles arc of two kinds ; cither such ns arc rtnplnyed in dc- 
 scription, or such us art! siii!;'j;estcd hy the warmth of passion. All 
 passions without exception, love, terror, amazement, indignation, and 
 oven ^rief, throw tlic mind into confusion, ug;>;rnvate their object!, 
 and of course prompt a hyperbolical style. Hence the following 
 sentiments of Satan in Milton, as strongly as they are described, con- 
 tain nothing; but whnt is natural and proper ; exhibiting the picture 
 uf a mind agitated uith rage and despair. 
 
 Me miserable ! which way shall I fly 
 Inlinite wruth, and inflnitfc despair i 
 Which way I fly is Hell, myself am Hell ; 
 And in the lowest depth a lower deep, 
 Still threatening to devour mc, opens wide, 
 To which the Hell I sufl'er seems a Heaven. 
 The fear of an enemy augments the conceptions of the size of their 
 leader. "I saw their chief,*' says the scout of Ossian, " tall as a 
 rock of ice; his spear, the blasted fir; his shield, the rising muon ; 
 he sat on the shore, like a cloud of mist on the hill." 
 
 E.nlamation. — Ivxdanmtion is an expression of some 
 sf'ntinieut produced by strong emotions of the mind ; 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 107 
 
 loiild bo 
 "The 
 
 ubstitu- 
 )art ; as, 
 id when 
 ?<?a, &c. 
 ?iire by 
 objects ; 
 informs 
 i rose/' 
 rom the 
 r thing ; 
 ) death! 
 ?tory?" 
 Dngthens 
 iitrasting 
 h to en- 
 but to 
 ; though 
 
 ifying an 
 we say, 
 htning ;" 
 
 lycd in dp- 
 ision. All 
 lation, and 
 ir objectf, 
 following 
 ribcd, con- 
 lie picture 
 
 
 zc of their 
 ' tall us a 
 ig muon; 
 
 [)f some 
 ! mind ; 
 
 such as those of surprise, admiration, joy, grief, &c., as, 
 *' O wretched man that I am !" " Ah me miserable !" 
 
 Irony. — Irony is a figure whieli consists in expressing 
 ourselves in a manner contrary to our thoughts, not 
 however with a view to deceive, but to add force to our 
 observations; as, when wo reprove a person for negli- 
 gence, by saying, " You have taken great care indeed."' 
 
 Ironical language has cllen a very strong cH'cct j particularly 
 when used by way of an exhoitation ; as for instance, when a person 
 has set forth the inconsistency ( f a thing, lie concludes with a feigned 
 encouragement to pursue it. Exclamation and Irony are sometimes 
 united ; as in Cicero's oration lor Balbus, where he derides his 
 accuser by saying, " O excellent interpreter of tiie law ! master of 
 antiquity ! corrector and amciuler (jf our constitution !" 
 
 (Jlimax. — Climax consi^sts in heightening all the cir- 
 cumstances of an object or action which we desire to 
 place in a strong light. 
 
 Cicero gives a lively instance of this figure when he says ; " It is a 
 crime to put a IJoman citizen in bonds ; it is tlie height of guilt to 
 scourge him : little less than parricide to put him to death: what 
 name then shall I give to the act of crucifying him '!" 
 
 There arc several other figures, such as P^.s/o/i, or Imagery, which 
 represents absent objects as actually jTc^sent; and Interrogation, 
 when a question is asked with the design of gaining information, but 
 for the purpose of defying contradiction to something already stated. 
 
 Balaam addressing himself to Balak says, '' The Lord is not a man 
 that He should lie, neither is He the sen of a man that He should re- 
 pent. Hath He said it 1 and shall He not do it '{ Hath He spoken 
 it ? and shall He not make it good % 
 
 Loc.rc. 
 
 Logic in its extensive sense may be considered as the sckncf, and 
 tlie art of reasoning. 
 
 It investigate!" the principles on which argumentation is deduced, 
 and furnishes rides to secure the mind from error in its deductions. 
 As it institutes an analysis of the process oi \\\v mind in reas(ming, 
 it is strictly a scicurr ; but, considered in reference! to the practical 
 rules above mentioned, it may be called tiie art of rcasdiiing. 
 SECTION I — Of tin; Opi^rations of the Mind. 
 
 In every argument there are three operations of the mind inunrdi- 
 ately concerned ; namely, Simple Jlpprc/icnsiun ; Judgment ; and 
 Reasoninf^. 
 
 Simple Apprehension is the conception of an object in tlie mind 
 analogous to the pereep ion of tlie senses. Judgment is the com- 
 paring together in tlie mind of two of the ideas wliieh are the objects 
 of apprehension. Keasonitig is the act of proceeding from one judg- 
 ment to another founded on the preceding one, or the result of it. 
 Hi;(;TioN II — (>/' iSi/llo(jltiitiJ>. 
 
 An act of apprehension expressed in language is culled a term ; 
 
108 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 an act of judgment a proposition ; and an act of reasoning an 
 argument. An argument, regularly expressed, is called a Syllogism. 
 A Syllogism therefore is an argument consisting of 
 three tei-ms so arranged that the conclusion, or third 
 term, necessarily follows from the other two ; as, 
 
 Every virtue is commendable. 
 
 Diligence is a virtue ; 
 
 Therefore diligence is commendable. 
 Every Syllogism has three ternis ; viz. the major, the minor, anu 
 the middle term, or, as they are sometimes called, the major and 
 minor extremes, and tlic niiddlc term. The major term is the attri- 
 bute of the conclusion ; the minor term, the subject of the conclusion : 
 and the middle term is tliat with wliieh the other two terms are com- 
 pared in order to judge of their agreement or disagreement. Every 
 syllogism moreovcrhiis three prepositions ; viz. the major proposi- 
 tion ; the minor proposition ; and the conclusion. The major pro- 
 position contains the major extreme and the middle term ; as, in the 
 above exa.m^\c, '' Every virtue is commendable." The minor pro- 
 position contains the minor extreme and the middle term; as, 
 '■' Diligence is a virtue.*^ The conclusion contains the major and 
 minor terms or extremes ; as, " The re fore diligence is corninendable.^* 
 In forming a Syllogism its validity may be tested by the following 
 rules : 
 
 Ruh I. If two torm^ agree with one and the same 
 third, they will agree Avith each other ; as, 
 
 A is equal to B, 
 
 And C is equal to B ; 
 
 Tliereforo A is equal to C. 
 Bale II. If one term agrees, and another disagrees 
 with one and the same third, these two will <lisagrcc 
 with each other. On the former of these rules rests tlu- 
 validity of affirmative conclusions ; on the latter, of 
 tuigatke. The major proposition of every Syllogism 
 sliuuld be universal, and ineontestably true. The fol- 
 lowing Syllogism is thei'elbre incorrect. 
 
 Some men arc intemperate ; 
 
 John is a man ; 
 
 Therefore he is intemperate. 
 But if we say ; All met) siiall die, 
 
 .lohn is a man ; 
 
 Therefore lie shall die ; it is correct. 
 
 Fioiu an ambiguous middle no defmite conulusion 
 can )Ki drawn ; as, 
 
 Light is contrary to dark»css ; •; 
 
 I'eathcrs are light ; therefore 
 
 Feathers arc contrary to darkness. 
 From uegatiNe j)remises nothing can bo inferred ; as, 
 
 A ti.Hh is not a quadruped ; 
 
 A bird is not a quadruped, proveM nothing. 
 
APPENDLX. 
 
 109 
 
 oning an 
 
 Syllogism. 
 
 tiiig of 
 
 [)r third 
 
 tnor, anu 
 najor and 
 I the altri- 
 )nclusion : 
 1 are com- 
 it . Every 
 r proposi- 
 najor prc- 
 as, in the 
 niiior pro- 
 term ; as, 
 major and 
 lendable." 
 following 
 
 he same 
 
 lisagrees 
 <lisagrue 
 rests the 
 ittor, of 
 yllogiam 
 Tho fol- 
 
 udusioi'. 
 
 re<l ; as, 
 
 ing. 
 
 
 SECTION III — Of the Dilemma. 
 A Dilemma ig a conditional Syllogism with several antecedents 
 in the major and a disjunctive minor term. The beauty of the . 
 dilemma consists chiefly in this, thatHhe truth of the proposition is in- 
 disputably established from either of its premises ; the opponent is 
 left no alternative, but forced to admit the inference. 
 
 Example. — " If that man were wise, he would not 
 speak irreverently of Scripture in a jest ; and, if he were 
 virtuous, ho would nut do so in earnest ; but he does it 
 either in jest or earnest ; therefore he is either umcisa 
 or mdous." Demosthenes in his Oration for the Crown 
 says ; "If iEschines joined in the public reioicings, he is 
 inconsistent ; if he did not, he is unpatriotic ; but ho 
 cither joined in the public rejoicings, or did not ; there- 
 fore he is either hicomistent or unpatnotic." 
 
 SECTION IV. — Of the Enthymeme and Sorites. 
 The Enthymcme is a kind of Syllogism with one premise oxpreysed 
 and the other understood. It is the ordinary form of speaking and 
 writing ; as, 
 
 " Ciesar was a tyrant ; therefore ho doscrxed death."' 
 " A free peoi)le are happy ; therefore the liritish are 
 hai)py." 
 
 VVIicn we have a series of Syllogisms in Avhich the conclusion of 
 the first is made the premise of the second, and so on, till we arrive 
 at the ultimate conclusion, it is called a Sorites ; as, 
 
 " Tile British are a brave people : ii brave ])eo})le are 
 free ; a free people arn happy ; therefore the IBritisli ai o 
 happy." 
 
 SECTION V — Of Omtonj. 
 
 Oratory is tho art of speaking justly, metliodically, 
 and elegantly upon any subject, so as to please, persuade, 
 and uistriict. A sj)eech, nia-le or delivert'd accoi'ding to 
 the ruk's of this art, is called an oration, and the 
 speaker, an orator. 
 
 An Oration has live parts, viz, the Exordium, Narra- 
 tion, Coiilinniition, Urlutation, and IVroration. 
 
 The E.vordium, or Preamble, is the beginning of the 
 Oratiim, designed to secure the attention of tlie hearers, 
 gain their good opinion, and giw them a general idea 
 of the subject. It should be brief, modest, and per- 
 s[)icnous. 
 
 The Narration is a n-cital of facts as they occiured, or 
 su[)p()sed to liave occurred. It shoidd be ma<l(! as pro- 
 bable, perspicuous, interesting, and concise as })ossil)l(' 
 
 E2 
 
110 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 The Confirmation is the establishing of the truth, or 
 proposition, as advanced in the Narration. 
 
 The Refutation, which should ever be lively and 
 pungent, is the repelling of the arguments of the oppos- 
 ing party by showing them to be false, unsound, or in- 
 conclusive. 
 
 The Peroration, or Conclusion, recapitulates the prin- 
 cipal arguments in a concise, forcible, and impressive 
 manner, so as to excite the feelings, and awaken love, 
 pity, or hatred. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 There are in the English language many words which require a 
 different termination in order to distinguish the sex ; for, when we say 
 of a M'oman, she is a philosopher, an astronomer, an actor, a builder, 
 SiC, we perceive an impropriety in the termination ; hence arises the 
 necessity of a difference in form or^termination in order to point out 
 the proper distinction. 
 
 Our language has three methods of distinguishing the 
 sex. 
 
 
 1 . By different words j 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. , 
 
 Bachelor, 
 
 maid. 
 
 King, 
 
 queen. 
 
 Boar, 
 
 sow. 
 
 Lad, 
 
 lass. 
 
 Boy, 
 
 girl. 
 
 Lord, 
 
 lady. 
 
 Brother, 
 
 sister. 
 
 Man, 
 
 woman. 
 
 Buck, 
 
 doc. 
 
 Master, 
 
 mistreis. 
 
 Bull, 
 
 cow. 
 
 Milter, 
 
 ■pawner. 
 
 Cock, 
 
 hen. 
 
 Nephew, 
 
 niece. 
 
 Dog, 
 
 bitch, slut. 
 
 Ram, 
 
 ewe. [singer 
 
 Drake, 
 
 duck. 
 
 Singer, 
 
 songstreu, or 
 
 Earl, 
 
 countess. 
 
 Sir, 
 
 madam. 
 
 Father, 
 
 motlier. 
 
 Sloven, 
 
 slut. 
 
 Friar, 
 
 nun. 
 
 Son, 
 
 daughter. 
 
 Gander, 
 
 goose. 
 
 Stag, 
 
 hind. 
 
 Hart, 
 
 roe. 
 
 Steer, 
 
 heifer. 
 
 Horse, 
 
 mare. 
 
 Uncle, 
 
 aunt. 
 
 Huisband, 
 
 wife. 
 
 Wizard, 
 
 witch. 
 
 
 2. By a terminational difference 
 
 • 
 
 Abbot, 
 
 abbesa. 
 
 Bridegroom, 
 
 bride. 
 
 Actor, 
 
 actress. 
 
 Caterer, 
 
 cateress. 
 
 Administrator, 
 
 administratrix. 
 
 Chanter, 
 
 chantrcss. 
 
 Adulterer, 
 
 adulteress. 
 
 Conductor, 
 
 conductress- 
 
 Ambassador, 
 
 ambassadress. 
 
 Count, 
 
 countess. 
 
 Arbiter, 
 
 arbitress. 
 
 Czar, 
 
 czarina. 
 
 Auditor, 
 
 auditroHH. 
 
 Deacon, 
 
 deaconess. 
 
 Author, 
 
 authoress. 
 
 Director, 
 
 directress. 
 
 Uaron, 
 
 baroness. 
 
 Duke, 
 
 duchess. 
 
 Bono^aclor, 
 
 bencfuclrcss. 
 
 Elector, 
 
 electrcia. 
 
ruth, or 
 
 ely and 
 e oppos- 
 d, or in- 
 
 he prin- 
 ipressive 
 en love, 
 
 require a 
 
 len we Bay 
 
 a builder, 
 
 arises the 
 
 I point out 
 
 ihlng the 
 
 \ne. 
 
 fi. 
 
 IS. 
 
 er. 
 
 [singer. 
 ress, or 
 
 n. 
 
 «r. 
 
 IS. 
 
 tress. 
 
 ss. 
 
 1. 
 
 ICSS. 
 CSS. 
 8. 
 
 ■s. 
 
 • 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Ill 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Emperor, 
 
 empress. 
 
 Lion, 
 
 lioness. 
 
 £nclianter, 
 
 enchantress. 
 
 Marquis, 
 
 marchioness* 
 
 Executor, 
 
 executrix. 
 
 Mayor, 
 
 mayoress. 
 
 Fornicator, 
 
 fornicatress. 
 
 Patron, 
 
 patroness. ,j 
 
 God, 
 
 goddess, 
 
 Peer, 
 
 peeress. 
 
 Governor, 
 
 governess. 
 
 Poet, 
 
 poetess. 
 
 Heir, 
 
 heiress. 
 
 Priest, 
 
 priestess. 
 
 Hero, 
 
 heroine. 
 
 Prince, 
 
 princess. 
 
 Host, 
 
 hostess. 
 
 Prior, 
 
 prioress. 
 
 Hunter, 
 
 huntress. 
 
 Prophet, 
 
 prophetess. 
 
 Iniieritor, 
 
 inheritress. 
 
 Proprietor, 
 
 proprietress. 
 
 Instructor, 
 
 instructress. 
 
 Protector, 
 
 protectress. 
 
 Jew, 
 
 Jewess. 
 
 Shepherd, 
 
 shepherdess. 
 
 Tutor, 
 
 tutoress. 
 
 Songster, 
 
 songstress. 
 
 Tyrant, 
 
 tyranness. 
 
 Sorcerer, 
 
 sorceress. 
 
 Victor, 
 
 victress. 
 
 Sultan, 
 
 sultana. 
 
 Viscount, 
 
 viscountess. 
 
 Tiger, 
 
 tigress. 
 
 Votary, 
 
 votaress. 
 
 Testator, 
 
 testatrix. 
 
 Widower, 
 
 widow. 
 
 Traitor, 
 
 traitress. 
 
 
 .3. By prefixing another word : as 
 
 A cock-f 
 
 parrow, 
 
 a hen-sparrow. 
 
 
 A he-bear 
 
 a she-bear. 
 
 
 " A he-goat, 
 
 a she-goat. 
 
 
 A male-child, 
 
 a female-child. 
 
 
 Male descendants. 
 
 female descendants. 
 
 A man-servant, 
 
 a maid-servant. 
 
 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 
 The following 
 
 C table exhibits tlie method of forming the plural of 
 
 those nouns which have been 
 
 adopted from the Hebrew, Greek, and 
 
 Latin languages 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ■ 
 
 riural. 
 
 
 Cherub. 
 
 
 (^horubim. 
 
 
 Seraph. 
 
 
 Sorapliim. 
 
 
 Appendix. 
 
 
 \ Appendices or, 
 } Appendixes. 
 
 Antithesis. 
 
 
 Antitheses. 
 
 
 Automaton. 
 
 
 Automata. 
 
 
 Basis. 
 
 
 Bases. 
 
 
 Crisis. 
 
 
 Crimes. 
 
 
 Criterion. 
 
 
 Criteria. 
 
 
 Diaeresis. 
 
 
 Diaereses. 
 
 
 Ellipsis. 
 
 
 Ellljines. 
 
 
 Emphasis. 
 
 
 Kiiil-hases. 
 
 
 Hypothesis. 
 
 
 llyjKJtheses. 
 
 
 Metamorphosis. 
 
 Metamorphose*. . 
 
 rhenomcnon< 
 
 
 Phenouiona. 
 
 
 - i 
 
112 
 
 APPENMX. 
 
 Shigidar. 
 Arcanum. 
 Axis. 
 Calx. 
 Datiini. 
 Effluvium. 
 
 Encomium. 
 
 Erratum. 
 
 Genius. 
 
 Gonus. 
 
 Index. 
 
 Lamina. 
 Medium. 
 Magus. 
 
 Memorandum. 
 
 Radius. 
 Stamen. 
 Stratum. 
 Vortex. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 Arcana. 
 
 Axes. 
 
 Calces. 
 
 Data. 
 
 Effluvia. 
 \ Encomia or 
 { Encomiums. 
 
 Errata. 
 
 Genii or GeniuseKS. 
 
 Genera. 
 (Indices or 
 \ Indexes. 
 
 Lamime. 
 
 Media. 
 
 Magi. 
 (Memoranda (^ 
 \ Memorandums. 
 
 Radii. 
 
 Stamina. 
 
 Strata. 
 
 Vortices. 
 
 Some words, derived from the learned languages, are confined tu 
 the pluial number ; as, antipodes, credenda, literati, minutiae. 
 
 The following nouns, being in Latin both singular and plural, art 
 used in the same manner when adopted into our tongue ; hiatus, ap- 
 paratus, series, species. 
 Rules ofSpellbu/ and Exercisea hi false Orthograj)hy. 
 Rule 1.— IVIonosyilablea ending with f, 1, or s, preceded by a single 
 vowel, double (he linal consonant ; as, staff, mill, pass, kc. The 
 only exceptions are, of, if, as, is, has, was, yts, his, this, us, aiid thus. 
 It is no great merit to spel properly ; but a great 
 defect to do it incorrectly. 
 
 Jacob worsliiped his Creator leaning on tho top of 
 his staf. 
 
 We may j)1aco too little, as well as too much stn-s 
 upon dreams. 
 
 Our manner should bo neither gros, nor excessively 
 rclinod. 
 
 Rule 2. — Monofiyllables ending with any consonant but f, I, f)r s, 
 and pn-cedcd by a single vowel, never double the final consonant ; 
 excepting only, add, cbl), butt, egg, odd, err, inn, bunn, purr,and buzz . 
 
 A carr siguifiea a chariot of war, or a small carriage 
 of burden. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 113 
 
 onlincd lu 
 iae. 
 
 plural, art 
 iiutus, ap- 
 
 ra/phy. 
 by a single 
 &c. The 
 , aiid thu^. 
 a grout 
 
 D top of 
 
 ich str«'» 
 
 [;«?ssivel}- 
 
 ; f, I, nr s, 
 onsonunt ; 
 ,arid Im/z . 
 
 carriage 
 
 In the names of druggs and plants the mistake in a 
 word may endanger life. 
 
 The finn of a lish is the limb by which he balances 
 his body and moves in the water. 
 
 Many a trapp is laid to insnare the feet of youth. 
 Rule 3. — Words ending with y, preceded by a consonant, form the 
 plurals of nouns, the persons of verbs, verbal nouns, past participles, 
 comparatives, and superlatives, by changing y into i ; as spy, spies ; 
 I carry, thou carriest ; he carrieth or carries ; carried ; happier, 
 happiest. 
 
 The present participle in ing retains the y, that i may not be 
 doubled ; as carry, carrying ; burying, &c. 
 
 But y, preceded by a vowel, in such instances as the above, is not 
 changed ; as, boy, boys ; I cloy, he cloys, cloyed, &c. ; except in 
 lay, pay, and say ; from which are formed, laid, paid, and said ; and 
 their compounds, unlaid, unsaid, &c. 
 
 We should subject our fancys to the government of 
 reason. 
 
 If thou .art seeking for the living amongst the dead, 
 thou wearyest thyself in vain. 
 
 If wo have denyed ourselves sinful pleasures, wo shall 
 bo great gainers in the end. 
 
 Rule -X. — Words ending with y, preceded by a consonant, upon 
 assuming an additional syllable heninning with a consonant, com- 
 monly change y into i ; as happy, happily, happiness. Dut when y is 
 preceded by a vowel, it is vt ry rarely changed in the additional sylla- 
 ble ; as, coy, coyly ; boy, boyish, boyhood j annoy, annoyed, annoy- 
 ance ; joy, joyless, joyful, &c. 
 
 It is a gi-cat blo^sing to have a sound mind, uninflu- 
 enced by fanciful huiuours. 
 
 Comniori calamities, and common blessings, fjill heav- 
 ily upon the envious. 
 
 The coiiiclynoss of youth are modesty and frankness ; 
 of age, condescension and dignity. 
 
 When wo act against conscience, we become the 
 destroiers of our pi'ace. 
 
 Rule 5. — Mon');<ylliibles, nnd words accented (in the last syllable, 
 ending willi a siiiL';!*' consonant preceded by a single vowel, double 
 that consonant, when flicy take anotiier syllable beginning with a 
 vowel; as Avit,, witty; thin, thiniiish; to abet, an abettor; to 
 begin, a beginner. 
 
 But, if a diphtliong precedes, or the aeeetit is on the preceding syl- 
 lable, the consonant, remains siisglo ; as, to toil, l(;iling, to otfer, an 
 olfering, maid, maiden, &,c. 
 
 When wo bring the lawmaker into contempt, we have 
 in effect annuled his lay.'s, 
 
114 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 By defying our repentance wc accumulate our sorrows. 
 
 The pupils should bo permited to ask questions. 
 
 We all have many faiUings and lapses to lament and 
 recover. 
 
 The Christian Lawgiver has prohibitted many things, 
 which the heathen philosophers allowed. 
 
 Rule 6. — Words ending with any double letter but 1, and taking 
 ness, less, ly, or ful, after them, preserve the letter double ; as, harm- 
 lessness, carelessness, carelessly, stiffly, successful, distressful, &c. 
 But those words which end with double 1, and take ness, less, ly, or 
 ful, after them, generally omit one 1, as fulness, skilless, fully, slulful, 
 &c. 
 
 Kestlesness of mind disqualifies us for the enjoyment 
 of peace. 
 
 The road to the blisful regions is open to all. 
 
 A chilnes or shivering of the body generally precedes 
 a fever. 
 
 To recommend virtue to others, our lights must shine 
 brightly, not dully. 
 
 Rule 7. — Ness, less, ly, md ful, added to words ending with silent 
 e, do not cut it off; as, paleness, guileless, closely, peaceful, except 
 in a few words ; as, duly, awful. 
 
 The warmth of disputation destroys that sedatness of 
 mind which is necessary to discover truth. 
 
 In all our reasonings our minds should be sincerly em- 
 ployed in the pursuit of truth. 
 
 The true worship of God is an important and awefiil 
 service. 
 
 Rule 8. — Ment, added to words ending with silent e, generally pre- 
 serves the e from elision ; as, abatement, chastisement, incitement, 
 Sic. 
 
 Like other terminations it changes y into i, when preceded by a 
 consonant ; as, accompany, accompaniment ; merry, merriment. 
 
 The study of the English language is making daily 
 advancment. 
 
 A judicious arrangment of studies facilitates improve- 
 ment. 
 
 Rule 9. — Able and ible, when incorporated into words ending 
 with silent e, almost always cut it off; as, blame, blamable; cjrc, 
 curable ; sense, sensible, &,c. ; but if c or g soft comes before e in 
 the original word, the e is then preserved in words compounded with 
 able ; as, change, changeable ; peace, peaceable, &c. 
 
 Every person and thing connected with self is apt to 
 appear good and desirable in our eyes. 
 
 The divine laws are not revcrseible by those of men. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 115 
 
 orrows. 
 
 IS. 
 
 »nt and 
 things, 
 
 id taking 
 as, harm- 
 Bful, &c. 
 ss, ly, or 
 Ji skilful, 
 
 oyment 
 
 )recedes 
 St shine 
 
 irith silent 
 il, except 
 
 itness of 
 erly em- 
 1 aweftil 
 
 Drally pre- 
 [icitement, 
 
 cded by a 
 iment. 
 
 ng daily 
 mprove- 
 
 Is ending 
 ble ; c jre, 
 lefore e in 
 nded with 
 
 S apt to 
 of men. 
 
 Gratitude is a forceible and active principle in gener- 
 ous minds. 
 
 Our natural defects of body are not chargable upon us. 
 
 Rule 10. — When ing or ish is added to words ending with silent c, 
 the e is almost universally omitted ; as, place, placing ; lodge, lodg- 
 ing ; slave, slavish ; prude, prudish. 
 
 An obligoing and humble disposition is totally uncon- 
 nected with a servile and cringing humour. 
 
 By solaceing the sorrows of others the heart is improv- 
 ed, at the same time that our duty is performed. 
 
 Labour and expense are lost upon a droneish spirit. 
 
 The inadvertencies of youth may be excused, but 
 knaveish tricks should meet with severe reproof. 
 
 Ride 11.— Words taken into composition often drop those letters 
 which were superfluous in tiieir simples as, handful, dunghil, withal, 
 also, chilblain, foretcl. 
 
 Love worketh no ill to our neighbour, and is the full- 
 filling of the law. 
 
 That which is sometimes expedient, is not allways so. 
 
 We may be hurtfull to others by our example as well 
 as by personal injuries. 
 
 Where diligence opens the door of the understanding, 
 and impartiality keeps it, truth finds an entrance and a 
 wellcome too. 
 
 ELLIPTICAL PHRASES. 
 
 Tne following table contains a few examples of contracted words, 
 which are frequently made use of, both in writing and conversation ; 
 they should however be avoided in dignified style, and even in familiar 
 discourse. 
 
 for I have known him. 
 
 " You are speaking again. 
 
 He has been out. 
 
 She has gone. 
 
 He is well. 
 
 We have recited. 
 
 They have gone, 
 
 I am going. 
 
 I will not offend. 
 
 He will not please. 
 
 It is true. 
 
 Who will hear him. 
 
 I cannot bear it. 
 
 I do not know. 
 
 I've known him, 
 You're speaking again. 
 He's been out, 
 She's gone, 
 He's well. 
 We've recited, 
 They've gone, 
 I'm going, 
 I'll not offend, 
 He'll not please, 
 'Tis true. 
 Who'll hear him, 
 I can't bear it, 
 I don't know, 
 
 u 
 (( 
 <; 
 
 <( 
 (( 
 <( 
 
 ^i 
 
 a 
 
116 
 
 APPENDIX* 
 
 He couldn't go, 
 She won't speak, 
 I did'nt do it. 
 You wouldn't, 
 I a'nt well, 
 He isn't at home, 
 
 for He could not go. 
 
 She will not speak. 
 
 I did not do it. 
 
 You would not. 
 
 I am not well. 
 
 He is not at home. 
 The following contractions are proper in poetry. 
 Fix'd, for Fixed. 
 
 Ling'ring, " Lingering. 
 
 He's dead, " He is dead. 
 
 'Tvvas, " It was. 
 
 O'er, " Over. 
 
 LATIN TERMS AND PHRASES WITH THE LITERAL' 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 With stronger reason. 
 
 <i 
 
 
 (( 
 
 <( 
 
 
 jl fortiori. 
 
 j2 posteriori. 
 
 A priori. 
 
 jib initio. 
 
 jld infinilum. 
 
 Ad valorem. 
 
 Alma mater. 
 
 Alias. 
 
 Alibi. 
 
 Anno Domini. 
 
 Anno Mundi. 
 
 Bona fide. 
 
 Cacoethos scribendi. 
 
 Caput mortuum. 
 
 Compos inentis. 
 
 De facto. 
 
 De jure. 
 
 Del gratid. 
 
 E pluribus unum. 
 
 Esto perpeiua. 
 
 Ex necessitate. 
 
 Ex officio. 
 
 Ex parte. 
 
 Ex tempore. 
 
 Fac simile. 
 
 Fiat justitia. 
 
 Ibidem. 
 
 Id est. 
 
 Ignis fatuus. 
 
 Imprimis. 
 
 In loco parentis. 
 
 lu propria persona. 
 
 In statu quo. 
 
 In terrorcm. 
 
 Ipse dixit. 
 
 From behind. 
 
 From before. 
 
 From the beginning. 
 
 Without limit. 
 
 According to value. 
 
 Cherishing mother. 
 
 Otherwise. 
 
 Elsewhere. 
 
 A. D., in the Tear of our Lord. 
 
 A. M., in the Year of the World. 
 
 In good faith. 
 
 Itch for writing. ^ 
 
 Dead head. 
 
 Of sound mind. .' 
 
 From the fact. 
 
 From the law. 
 
 By the grace of God. i 
 
 One of more. 
 
 May it be perpetual. J 
 
 From necessity. 
 
 From virtue of office. 
 
 On one side. 
 
 Without premeditation. 
 
 Exact resemblance. 
 
 Let justice be done. 
 
 In the same place. 
 
 i. e. that is. 
 
 Foolish fire, will-o'-the-wisp. " 
 
 In the first place. 
 
 In place of a parent, j 
 
 In his own person. 
 
 In the former state. 
 
 As, a warning. 
 
 Naked assertion. > 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 117 
 
 ^ERAL 
 
 r Lord, 
 e World. 
 
 
 vup. 
 
 Ipso facto. 
 Jure divino. 
 Labor omnia vincit. 
 LapsM lingua. 
 Magna charta. 
 Memento mori. 
 Meum et tuum. 
 Modus operandi. 
 Multum in parvo. 
 Ne plus ultra. 
 Nemine contradicente» 
 Nolens volens. 
 Non compos mentis. 
 O tempora ! O mores ! 
 Omis probandi. 
 Per. 
 Per se. 
 
 Posse comitatiis. 
 Post mortem. 
 Prima facie. 
 Primum mobile. 
 Pro bono publico. 
 Pro confesso. 
 Pro et con. 
 Quid ])ro quo. 
 Quantuin sufficit. 
 Rex. 
 Regina. 
 
 Sanctum Sanctorum. 
 Secundem artem. 
 Sine die. 
 Sine qua non. 
 Sub rosa. 
 Sub silentio. 
 Sui generis. 
 Sujnmum bonum. 
 Terra firma. 
 
 Utile dulri. 
 
 Vade mecum. 
 
 Vale. 
 
 Verbatim. 
 
 Veni, vldif vici. 
 
 Versus, 
 
 Veto. 
 
 Vi et armis. 
 
 Via. 
 
 Vice versa. 
 
 Viva voce. 
 
 Vox JJci. 
 
 Vox popnii. 
 
 By the fact. ' 
 
 By divine right. 
 
 Labor surmounts all. 
 
 A slip of the tongue. 
 
 The great charter. 
 
 Remember death. 
 
 Mine and thine. 
 
 Mode of operation. 
 
 Much in little. 
 
 Nothing more beyond. 
 
 None opposing. 
 
 Unwilling or willing. 
 
 Not of sound mind. 
 
 Oh the times ! Oh the manners ! 
 
 Burden of proof. • 
 
 By, for. 
 
 By itself. 
 
 Power of the county. 
 
 After death. 
 
 At first sight. 
 
 First cause of motion. 
 
 For public good. 
 
 As il" conceded. 
 
 For and against. 
 
 Mutual consideration. 
 
 Sufficient quantity. 
 
 King. 
 
 Queen. 
 
 The Holy of Holies. 
 
 According to art. 
 
 Without a day, indefinitely. 
 
 Indispensable, requisite. 
 
 Under the rose. 
 
 In silence. 
 
 Peculiar to itself. 
 
 Tlie chief good. 
 
 The solid earth* 
 
 The useful with the pleasant. 
 
 Constant componion. 
 
 Farewell. 
 
 Word for word. 
 
 I came, I saw, I conquered. 
 
 Vs., against. 
 
 I rGri)id it. 
 
 By force and arms. 
 
 By the way of. 
 
 Tiic reverse. 
 
 By the living voice. 
 
 Voice of God. 
 
 Voice of the people- 
 
 THE END.